JP6641582B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine using a game ball as a game medium.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine includes a main control board that controls a game and a sub-control board that performs control processing based on a command (effect control command) from the main control board. Among these, examples of the sub-control board include a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an illumination control board, and an acoustic control board. Further, in some pachinko gaming machines, when the operation of the firing handle has not been performed for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board transmits a command for a customer waiting demonstration (eg, paragraph 0181 in Patent Document 1). Further, in paragraph 0055 of Patent Document 2, it is described that the number of players is counted based on a touch signal related to a firing handle and a fluctuation state of a decorative symbol (a state of an effect by a moving image).
Japanese Patent No. 5991760 JP 2007-244761 A

  By the way, in pachinko gaming machines, the use of operation detection (also referred to as “touch detection”) related to the firing handle is very limited as disclosed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 described above. Has become. This is probably because attention to touch detection is low, and few people are aware of the possibility of touch detection. Pachinko and other gaming machines are required to have a variety of game characteristics and selections, but by considering various control modes starting from steering wheel operation detection, we believe that the diversity of gaming machines can be further improved. Can be

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the variety of gaming machines, and in particular, to more effectively utilize detection of a player's operation by a firing handle or the like. It is to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can be used.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the present invention fires a game ball in a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. As a result, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stop-displayed, and a special game in which a profit can be given to a player when the symbol displayed in a stopped state has a predetermined display mode. A gaming machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (emission intensity volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
Volume adjustment means (such as a cross key) that enables a player to adjust the volume of the effect ,
The main control means can fire a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation detected by the rotation operation detection means on condition that touch detection is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
Among the effects, there is one that is output in response to the touch detection (such as a touch effect),
The main control means includes:
After the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine, even if a game ball enters the starting winning opening before the touch detection means detects the contact of the player, the variation display of the symbol is displayed. Performing, transmitting transmission information corresponding to the variable display of the symbol to the sub-control means ,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized by being able to simultaneously execute an effect output in response to the touch detection and volume control using the volume control unit .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the variety of gaming machines and utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the function of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a main board configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2A is a front view showing a board case in which a main board is accommodated, and FIG. 2B is a partial cross-sectional view schematically showing a portion taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing basic functional means of a main board, a sub main board, and a sub-sub board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main symbol display board of a main control display device. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a display on the effect display device while the effect symbol is changing, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect symbol while the effect symbol is stopped. (A) is a chart showing a hit / fail judgment table, and (b) is a chart showing a change pattern table for out-of-place. (A) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a small hit symbol determination table used at the time of a small hit. FIG. 3D is a chart showing a lost symbol determination table used at the time of a loss. FIG. 7B is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a loss, FIG. 7B is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a 15R hit, and FIG. 7C is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at a time of a 5R hit. Is a chart showing the hit value and payout rate for each set value. (A) is a chart showing a look-ahead determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a look-ahead code correspondence table. 6 is a flowchart showing a power-on process in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interruption process in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery determination process in a main board. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off process in a main board. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state before a steering wheel operation, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state at the time of steering wheel operation. It is a perspective view showing the state which looked at an operation button, a cross key, and those circumferences from the front upper part. 4 is a chart showing control elements related to touch detection. 23 is a chart showing control elements following FIG. 22. (A) is a chart showing the pros and cons of performing an effect according to the state of the gaming machine, and (b) is a chart showing the pros and cons of performing the effect following (a). It is a chart showing the effect type for each state of the gaming machine. 26 is a chart showing the effect types following FIG. 25. FIG. (A) is a chart showing the effect regulation related to the second and subsequent touch detections, and (b) is a chart showing the effect regulation following (a). It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production output at the time of setting change. It is a timing chart which shows an example of an effect output at the time of environment setting. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production output at the time of reach display. It is a timing chart which shows an example of an effect output at the time of the big hit end demonstration display. (A) is a timing chart showing an effect output example at the time of power-off recovery when there is a power-off during the game standby, and (b) an effect-output example at the time of power-off recovery when there is a power-off during symbol fluctuation. FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a standby screen A, (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of a standby screen B, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a display screen C (environment setting screen). (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect output at the time of touch detection at the time of the standby screen A, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect output at the time of touch detection during fluctuation stop. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of an energization return screen in a standby screen A, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of an energization return screen during a symbol change. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an abnormal display related to a door opening error, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting change screen A, and (b) is an example of a setting changing screen in a standby screen B. FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a normal reach screen, (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of an SP reach screen, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit end demonstration screen. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit start demonstration screen, (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of a screen during a round, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of a special during-hit effect screen. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a special during-hit effect screen different from FIG. 38 (c), (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an inter-round effect screen, and (c) is a different hit screen from (a). It is an explanatory view showing an example of a middle specific effect screen. (A) is an explanatory view showing an effect mode before a touch effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode at the time of a touch effect. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect output before a touch notice, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect output after a touch notice. (A) is a chart showing a selection table of a notice group related to change before touch, (b) is a chart showing a selection table of a notice group related to change of touch transition, and (c) is a look-ahead notice related to change before touch. And (d) is a chart showing a selection table for a pre-reading notice relating to a change in touch transition.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then, the game procedure, effects, control modes, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>

  FIG. 1 shows a front configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is mounted on a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Among them, the game board 50 has different components such as accessory devices and designs depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 10. Further, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11.

  In addition, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 for a plurality of types of gaming boards 50, a so-called model change in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models becomes possible. I have. In the following, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

  The above-described gaming machine frame 11 has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also referred to as an "inner frame" or a "body frame") 13, and a lower front plate (also referred to as a "curtain plate") 14. . Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used to fix the pachinko gaming machine 10 at a predetermined position in island facilities in a game arcade (game store), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the above-mentioned lower front plate 14 have an opening part whose front side is closed.

  In addition, nailing is generally performed as a method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility. Wood is used as a material of at least a portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island facility. Instead of wood, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed can be used. In addition, as a method of installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility, a method other than nailing may be employed.

  The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape matching the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings rearward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and locks, thereby returning to the closed state. When the front frame 13 is closed, the front frame 13 covers a portion between the upper and lower portions of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 described above.

  The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a lock device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder 17 of the lock device is disposed below the free end of the front frame 13, and the cylinder 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed forward of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through the plate unit 16 described above. When the game shop clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

  The above-mentioned lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13 with respect to the front frame 13 and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always covers the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

  The glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 arranged at the front of the front frame 13 are mounted on the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently of each other with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, a game room clerk swinging forward and horizontally, and swinging horizontally horizontally from the open state and locked to the front frame 13. This results in a closed state.

  The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the above-described locking device (not shown). That is, when a game store clerk inserts a key into the keyhole of the above-described cylinder 17 and turns the key clockwise, for example, in the opposite direction to when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. , And the glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed in parallel with the front frame 13, so that the locking device is operated, and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. Lock to frame 13.

  When the glass door 15 is opened, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the plate unit 16 appears and becomes operable, and an operating unit (not shown) of the locking mechanism is operated by a game arcade clerk, for example, in a downward direction. By performing the pushing operation, the plate unit 16 is opened. Further, the plate unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the plate unit 16 is pushed in parallel with the front frame 13, so that the locking mechanism is activated, and the plate unit 16 is moved again. Lock to front frame 13.

  Further, the glass door 15, for example, detachably holds two parallel transparent plates, and when in a closed state, allows the game board 50 to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. Like that. As the transparent plate, besides a glass plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used. By opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held on the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage and the like for guiding and collecting game balls as game media.

  The dish unit 16 has an upper bowl 18, a lower bowl 19, a firing handle 20, and the like on its front surface. Among them, the upper ball plate 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launching device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated through the firing handle 20, and plays the lower ball plate 19. Mechanisms for various functions, such as ball ejection, are provided. The lower ball tray 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and stores the game balls in a ball box (a so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms for various functions such as ejection are provided. In some cases, the carton is provided integrally with the island facility.

  Further, in this embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided at the upper corner of the glass door 15 and the lower front plate 14, and the like, and through these speakers 21, a game state, an effect pattern, and the like are provided. BGM and various sound effects are output.

  Further, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on a portion of the upper bowl 18 facing the player. The operation button 22 is provided on an outer wall surface above the upper bowl 18 and is located near the center of the upper bowl 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 includes an operation button light emitter (not shown) inside, and outputs light according to the effect pattern to be executed.

  The operation button 22 may be protruded upward in a predetermined case using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown in detail, the operation button 22 in the present embodiment may be displaced in such a manner that the tip of the operation button 22 is protruded upward by driving of a lifting / lowering motor, thereby forming an operation lever input portion capable of performing input by tilting. It is possible, and has a semi-lunar eccentric cam for generating vibration in the drive system of the operation lever.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a cross key 96 is provided in addition to the operation buttons 22, and various environment settings can be performed by the player using the cross key 96. Examples of the contents of the environment setting include adjustment of the volume of the speaker 21, adjustment of the brightness and light amount of the effect display described later, and change of the effect mode described later. Further, it is possible to provide a display capable of performing an effect related to a game and displaying the above-described environment setting, for example, on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11.

Further, in addition to the cross key, for example, a lever-shaped operation means, various types of touch panels, and the like can be used. In FIG. 21, reference numeral 97 denotes a ball lending button, and reference numeral 98 denotes a return button. Further, reference numeral 98 in FIG. 21 denotes a ball removal button for the upper bowl 18.
<Back view of pachinko machine>

  Next, a basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a set base (also referred to as a “back set board”) 31 provided with a game ball path for guiding or collecting game balls on the back surface of the front frame 13 and serving as a prize ball path forming mechanism. A power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire gaming machine and a payout control (also referred to as "prize ball control") for controlling the gaming machine frame are provided below the set base 31. 103 are attached in a state where they are housed in respective exclusive transparent cases. On the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 for totally controlling the entire game and a sub-board 104 for executing effect control based on a control command from the main board 102 are provided respectively. It is accommodated in a transparent case and provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set base 31. Further, the set base 31 is also provided with a launch device 43 and a launch control board 105 for controlling the launch device 43.

  In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island facility and serving as prize balls. Further, below the winning ball tank 33, a winning ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a winning ball discharging passage 36 are provided. The award ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the award ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from above the gaming board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Have been.

  The above-mentioned prize ball passage 34 guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. In addition, the payout unit 35 can communicate with the prize ball passage 34 and discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flowing down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as prize balls.

  The power supply unit 32 is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from outside the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the voltages to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub-board 104, and the like. A power switch 40 for operating the power supply unit 32 is disposed behind other devices as shown by a hidden line (broken line) at a lower right portion in the drawing. The power switch 40 is installed so as to be turned on when the power switch 40 is pressed downward from the center and tilted downward so that the dropped game ball does not turn off even when hit directly.

  The payout control board 103 is disposed at a lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 in response to a command related to payout from the main board 102 or a lending request from the outside. In addition, the above-described launch control board 105 has a launch control function of controlling the launch device 43 so that a game ball (hit ball) is launched into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

  The main board 102 described above is disposed at the lower center portion on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly includes various lottery functions, setting change functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 10 has a central processing function. The sub-substrate 104 described above is arranged at the upper center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

  As for the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in the present embodiment) having a main function of effect control, and a sub-sub-board (in this embodiment, specialized in a specific effect function such as image creation) Sub-substrate 302), and the term "sub-substrate" includes these. On the lower right side on the back side of the set base 31, an external relay terminal board (such as a “frame relay terminal board”) that relays signals from the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 to devices outside the pachinko gaming machine 10 ) Is provided.

The above-described setting change function on the main board 102 is a function that can change a set value that defines theoretical ease of hitting (the degree of advantage of the player). In the present embodiment, six types of integer values “1” to “6” are provided as set values, and for each of these set values, a probability value related to a theoretical big hit or a small hit, and The payout rate is different. Such a change in the set value, a jackpot probability for each set value, and the like will be described later.
<Game board configuration>

  Next, the game board 50 and components (board components) arranged on the board of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of components made of a transparent resin material (for example, a transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood). The game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball path for guiding game balls to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The game board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board components are mounted facing forward, and is closed by the glass door 15 or the like in a closed state. The front is covered. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining an inner rail and an outer rail formed into a curved belt shape.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 52, a first starting winning opening 62 and a second starting winning opening 63, a large winning opening device 90 (attacker unit), an operating opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and An out port (58) which is arranged at the lowermost portion of the game area 52 and is hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for an effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

In the game area 52, a number of game nails (not shown) and mechanisms such as windmills are provided. In addition, it is also possible not to provide a windmill. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the game board 50 at the lower left of the game area 52. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. In addition, the above-described board surface configuration of the game board 50 can be variously changed depending on, for example, the game characteristics and the like employed in the pachinko gaming machine 10.
<Functions of panel parts>

  Subsequently, specific functions and configurations relating to the individual panel components described above will be described. First, the first starting winning opening 62 described above is a starting winning opening relating to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, the first start winning opening 62 has a first start winning detection device 74 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is as described above. Is input to the main board 102 of the first embodiment.

  The above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening relating to the second game, and is arranged on the right side of the first starting winning opening 62. The second starting winning opening 63 is a starting opening related to an ordinary electric accessory (a so-called “electric tulip” or “electric tuy”). A blade (opening / closing blade) that performs an opening operation is provided on the right side in FIG. 1. Then, the second start winning opening 63 opens and closes the opening / closing wings for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment, and a configuration may be adopted in which a normal electric accessory is not provided in the starting port for the second game, or a configuration in which a normal electric accessory is provided for the starting port for the first game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 includes a second start winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening and closing blade. . The output signal of the second start winning detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes for opening the second start winning opening 63. These open modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as "short open" or "short open") and a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). Modes (referred to as “long open” or “long open”). It is also possible to provide a middle opening mode set to an opening time between the short opening and the long opening.

  The above-mentioned general winning opening 72 is provided with a general winning detecting device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entering of a game ball, as shown in FIG. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

  When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by a plurality of general winning openings 72, the game balls having entered the plurality of general winning openings 72 are gathered at a position where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged, and detected. It is possible to It is also possible to group a plurality of general winning ports 72 for each positional relationship or for each number of winning balls (common use of the general winning detecting device 73).

  The above-mentioned special winning opening device 90 is formed in a case shape by combining components made of transparent synthetic resin. Although not shown, a special winning opening that can be visually recognized by a player is provided inside the case. . The special winning opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has an opening / closing door 91 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening and closing the opening. Then, when a predetermined winning occurs, the special winning opening performs an opening operation in a predetermined mode. Here, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening is opened upward, and the opening / closing door 91 is slidable in the front-back direction.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the special winning opening device 90 includes a special winning detection device 78 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a special winning opening (opening) solenoid for driving the above-mentioned opening and closing door 91 to open and close. 80. Among them, the special winning detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening device 90, and its output signal is input to the main board 102.

  It should be noted that various types of special winning opening devices 90 can be employed. For example, as the special winning opening device 90, one having a special winning opening opened forward, one having an upward opening can be used. Also, as the special winning opening device 90, a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening / closing patterns) related to the above-described opening and closing doors 91 for opening and closing the special winning opening are provided. It is possible to employ a device that operates the opening / closing door 91. Further, as the special winning opening device 90, a device having a plurality of special winning openings and distributing gaming balls to each special winning opening according to the game situation can be adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the operating port 68 includes a passage detecting device 69, and the passing detecting device 69 has a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball at the operating port 68. The output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of a ball.

  The above-mentioned out port 58 is provided with an out ball detecting device (out port sensor) 82 as shown in FIG. The out mouth sensor 82 detects a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out mouth 58 without being a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52. The detection result of the out-mouth sensor 82 is used for counting out-balls and displaying (base display) on a later-described performance display unit (entering-ball status display 808 in FIG. 5 described later). I have.

  The above-described center decoration 64 has an effect function and the like, and inside the center decoration 64, an LED board on which a number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED is transmitted through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration (light effect). Further, the light decoration in the center decoration 64 is performed not only during a game, but also during a standby for waiting for a game to start, or during a game preparation for a player to perform light amount adjustment (light amount setting) and the like. Details regarding these will be described later.

  A plurality of movable effect members are provided on the back (inside) of the center decoration 64, and these movable effect members constitute a gimmick for effect. These movable effect members are normally hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, although not shown, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60.

  In the present embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is also performed on the movable effect member. Further, the light decoration on the movable effect member is performed not only during the game, but also during a standby for waiting for the game to start, or during the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount.

  Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed at the right side of the center decoration 64 when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a function of a flow path of the game ball in addition to the above-described effect function. Have.

  The center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. Although not shown, as the light guide plate 88, for example, a plate having two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surface facing forward and backward can be adopted. Further, the light guide plate 88 is mounted on the center decoration 64, and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover of the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

  The light guide plate 88 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in a strip shape inside the center decoration 64 so as to face, for example, one of the left and right end surfaces of the transparent plate. Then, at normal times, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that a player can visually recognize the image without superimposing another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

  However, inside each transparent plate constituting the light guide plate 88, fine irregularities are formed which are invisible to a normal environment. Then, during the execution of the predetermined effect, for example, the above-described light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and from the end face of the transparent plate, light from the light source is emitted toward the inside of the transparent plate. You. Further, the light is diffused due to the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and the diffused light causes a predetermined illustration or the like to appear in color so that the player can recognize it.

  Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88, the other transparent plate is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-described illustration and the like. Then, at the time of a predetermined effect, by driving the light source facing the end surface, an illustration or the like different from the above-mentioned ones emerges so that the player can recognize it.

  Here, it is also possible to face the light source not only to one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate but also to one of the upper and lower end faces, and to project another illustration or the like by the light of this light source. In this manner, two types of images can be displayed on one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. In addition, a transmissive liquid crystal display may be used instead of or in addition to the light guide plate 88.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 includes a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256 on which a number of LED indicators are arranged. On the symbol display board 256, a normal symbol display portion 59 for displaying the above-mentioned normal symbol, a first special symbol display portion 70 for displaying a first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game corresponding to the second game A second special symbol display section 71 for displaying a second special symbol (to be described later) and various other display sections are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. Note that the above-described ordinary symbol display section 59 constitutes an ordinary symbol display device. The first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device.

  In the following, the ordinary symbol is “Public”, the special symbol is “Special”, and the first special symbol is “First special”, “Special 1”, “Special 1”, and the second special symbol is “ It may be referred to as "second special map", "special map 2", "special 2", or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".

Further, the main control display device 53 described above means a device provided on the game board 50, and a setting display unit provided on the main board 102 (setting of FIG. The main control display device may include a display device 807) and a performance display unit (ball entry status display device 808 in FIG. 5A described later). In such a case, the setting display unit and the performance display unit provided on the main board 102 may be referred to as, for example, a “main board-side main control display device”.
<Basic game procedure>

  Subsequently, a game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where a game ball is supplied to the above-described upper ball tray 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-described firing handle 20, the upper ball tray 18 has an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. Game balls are fired at predetermined intervals one by one. Then, the game ball is guided by the inner rail and the outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

  In a normal game, the player fires so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52 and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located at the lower central portion of the game area 52. Such a mode of firing mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is called so-called left-handed. The firing of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the above-described firing device 43 while the player operates the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously discharged into the game area 52 drop in a direction corresponding to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or the reflection angle) while interfering with a plurality of game nails, windmills, and the like.

  When a game ball falls into various winning ports such as the above-mentioned general winning port 72 and the first starting winning port 62, the incoming ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls via the above-mentioned payout unit 35 in accordance with the type of the winning port that has entered the ball. When the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the paid out subsequent game balls cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. .

  Further, the game balls dropped into various winning holes become safe balls, and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. Further, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port (58), and is guided to the back side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball reaching the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter or a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 to the above-mentioned island facility side. Is discharged.

  The above-described operating port 68 is a gate through which a game ball passes, unlike the above-mentioned winning port that generates a safe ball. In the following, the “winning opening” including the operating opening 68 will be referred to, and the terms “drop in”, “entering the ball”, and “winning” in the present embodiment include the meaning of “passing” relating to the gate.

  When a game ball enters the operating port 68, a normal symbol (described later) is displayed on the main control display device 53 if a predetermined variation start condition (general symbol variation start condition) described later is satisfied. It is displayed fluctuating. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (general figure lottery) executed based on a ball entering the operating port 68, and is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time. Is done.

  When the game ball enters the starting opening (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), a predetermined change start condition (special figure change start condition) described later is satisfied. For example, a special symbol (described later) is variably displayed on the main control display device 53. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of a random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on a ball entering the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. .

  In the above-described effect display device 60, an effect display relating to a special symbol is performed. This effect display differs in whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or in a stop display, or in the difference that the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or an out of order. In connection therewith, effects of various predetermined modes are performed.

  In the big hit game in which the special game is executed, a unit game in which the big winning port device 90 is operated and the big winning port (not shown) is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Further, the special game includes a type in which a unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and a type in which a unit game is repeated a number of times smaller than the maximum number. The maximum number of times can be exemplified by 15 times (15R (round)), and the number of times smaller than the maximum number can be exemplified by 5 times (5R). A special game in which a unit game in which a large winning opening is opened is performed only once is referred to as a "small hit".

  In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected in the corresponding special winning opening, or when a total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), The end condition is satisfied, and the special winning opening is closed. The term “total opening time” as a condition for terminating a unit game indicates that an upper limit is set even when a plurality of large winning openings are divided and opened in one unit game. ing. By opening multiple winning prizes within a unit game to enhance technical intervention, or by opening it once, it is easy to obtain a winning ball. The opening mode of the special winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game characteristic in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the first type pachinko gaming machines in the related art is adopted. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into a first game in which the first start winning port 62 is used and a second game in which the second start winning port 63 is used. Then, in a situation where the second game has a higher priority than the first game, and at the same time the start condition of the game is satisfied, the second game is executed with priority and the first game is suspended, The first game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game, depending on the result of the above-mentioned jackpot lottery. This specific game is in a mode different from the above-mentioned special game, and is in a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In the present embodiment, as specific games, probability variation games (hereinafter referred to as “probable changes”), fluctuation time reduction games (hereinafter referred to as “time savings”), and ball entry facilitation games are provided. As the specific game, there is a game that executes only one of probabilistic change, time saving, and a ball entry facilitation game, and a game that performs a plurality of specific games at the same time.

  When the specific game is executed, a notification of the recommended launch position and launch timing of the game ball (for example, an effect prompting a right strike) is executed by the image and sound of the effect display device 60. When the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and fires the game ball toward the right area of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is , Enters the game ball passage 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. Further, the game balls released from the center decoration 64 fall in a direction according to how they hit while hitting a plurality of game nails or other structures.

  A part of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 passes through the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operating port 68, the above-mentioned ordinary symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbols is stopped in a predetermined hit mode. Then, the ordinary electric accessory in the second start winning opening 63 expands for a predetermined time according to the hit mode.

  In the present embodiment, a game ball reaching the right side of the game area 52 can be guided around the second starting winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90 by a nail or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, a ball entry facilitation game is added to the time reduction that is a specific game, and during the time reduction, the extension of the normal electric character is extended by the ball entry facilitation game, The combination of the probability variation of the object and the time reduction of the ordinary electric accessory is performed, and the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory is easily performed. Then, during normal working hours, one or a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63 when the ordinary electric accessory of the second starting winning opening 63 is opened once. ing.

When a special game is executed after a big hit occurs, a special winning opening (not shown) of the special winning opening device 90 is opened. Is possible. Then, in this case, before starting the special game, it is conceivable to execute an effect that prompts the player to make a right-hand shot by using an image or sound of the effect display device 60.
<Example of jackpot type: ST>

  Next, the types of big hits in the first game and the second game will be described. First, as the big hit, a big hit that repeats the above-mentioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as “15R big hit”) and a big hit that repeats the unit game 7 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as “7R big hit”) are provided. . In addition, the lottery mode of these big hits will be described later.

  The above-mentioned unit game is started with the opening of the special winning opening in the special winning opening device 90 in the special game, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10 (Or more) game balls are dropped in, and the special winning opening is closed. The special game in which such a unit game is repeated is based on a so-called ball-out (sometimes referred to as ball-out) hitting game for the purpose of causing a player to acquire a game ball. Furthermore, among the various jackpots, the 15R jackpot, the 7R jackpot, and the like are intended to cause the player to acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a part of the big hit, it is possible to provide a 15R big hit or a part of the 15R big hit that does not change (15R normal or 7R normal). Also, for example, even in the case of a 15R jackpot, there is provided a system in which the opening period of the special winning opening is short and only a ball that is substantially the same as the 5R jackpot can be obtained (15R probability change (actual 5R)), Even in such a case, it is possible to provide such a system that almost no ball can be obtained (for example, only a minimum degree (for example, one ball) of each R enters the special winning opening device 90).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific game state such as the probability change and the time saving is generated for a predetermined specific big hit. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, it is possible to provide, for example, a jackpot in which at least one copy is not provided among privilege functions such as a probability change, a time reduction, and a game for facilitating entering a ball. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a reduced time. Furthermore, it is also possible to make the type of jackpot different depending on the difference in the duration of the probable change or the difference in the duration of the time reduction. In addition, when the power saving support is also performed during the working hours, the “time saving duration” can be rephrased as the “power saving support duration”. Furthermore, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support among the time saving and the electric chew support.

However, the combination of the jackpot, the probability change, the time saving, and the like are not limited to those of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, a probability change may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all of the 15R jackpots in the present embodiment are 15R jackpots with a probability change (15R probability change), and all of the 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with a probability change (7R probability change).
<Hits other than big hits>

In this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a hit type other than the big hit. In the first game (or the second game), when the small hit occurs, the special winning opening device 90 is opened once, for example. In addition, the lottery mode of the small hit will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of Main Control Display Device >>

  Next, the above-described main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 on the game board side is configured by arranging a large number (36 in this case) of LED display lights on the symbol display substrate 256 in two rows (upper and lower rows). It is configured. In the present embodiment, the number of LED indicators in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicators in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. In addition, the intervals between the LED indicators in the upper and lower positions are also constant for all 18 LEDs.

  In the main control display device 53, the rightmost ten LED indicators in the upper part as viewed from the front are used for displaying information according to Tokusatsu 1, and the ten rightmost LED indicators in the lower part are shown in Tokusatsu 2. It is used for such information display. In the upper and lower rows, the two LED indicators on the right end constitute a first special symbol storage display section 83 and a second special symbol storage display section 84 indicating the number of reserved storages. The eight LED indicator lamps arranged to the left of the first special symbol storage display unit 83 constitute the above-described first special symbol display unit 70, and the eight LED indicators arranged to the left of the second special symbol storage display unit 84. The LED indicators constitute the second special symbol display section 71 described above.

  The first special symbol display section 70 is capable of performing a variable display and a stop display of the first special symbol relating to the first game by operating the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to a result of a first lottery performed when a game ball enters the first starting winning opening 62, and a variable display thereof is predetermined. When the game is stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. Note that the first special symbol display unit 70 displays a maximum of 255 (= 2 ＾ 8) at the time of the stop display of the first special symbol by a combination of turning on and off each LED indicator light, excluding the case where all are turned off. -1) Kind of identification information can be displayed.

  Similarly, the above-mentioned second special symbol display section 71 has a maximum of 255 (= 2) at the time of the stop display of the second special symbol according to the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. # 8) The type of identification information can be displayed.

  Furthermore, in the upper stage, four LED indicator lights arranged on the left of the first special symbol display section 70 are used for displaying information related to ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols). The two LED indicators arranged to the left of the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 constitute a normal symbol storage display unit 85 for displaying the number of ordinary symbols to be stored, and on the left side thereof. The two LED indicators arranged side by side constitute a normal symbol display section 59.

  The normal symbol display section 59 performs a variable display and a stop display of the normal symbol according to the operation mode of the two LED indicators. The normal symbol display section 59 can display a maximum of 3 (= 2 ＾ 2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display.

  Further, a round number display section 86 is constituted by two LEDs arranged on the left side of the ordinary symbol display section 59 in the upper stage and two LED indicators on the lower left side located therebelow. In the lower part, the four LED indicators between the round number indicator 86 and the second special symbol indicator 71 are a first status indicator (status indicator 1) 87a and a second status indicator in order from the left. (Status indicator light 2) 87b, a third status indicator (status indicator light 3) 87c, and a fourth status indicator (status indicator light 4) 87d.

  The above-described first state display section 87a is turned on when the probability variation function according to the special figure is activated, and the second state display section 87b is turned on when the probability variation function according to the ordinary figure is activated. I have. Further, the second state display portion 87b is also turned on at the time of extension opening, which is a so-called electric support (electric chew support) state. Further, the third state display portion 87c is used as a separate (right-handed) state indicator. Further, the fourth state display section 87d is used as an error indicator light.

  Here, the above-mentioned third state display portion 87c (divisional state indicator lamp) is turned on not only during the power support state but also during a big hit. During the big hit, the flag for setting the electric support state (electric support flag) and the like are off even during the extended holiday. In addition, the third state display portion 87c is also lit when the normal electric accessory is in a long open state in a state other than the above (normal state).

The main control display device 53 having such a configuration (the game board-side main control display device) is electrically connected to the main board 102 as shown in FIG. Various display units of the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In FIG. 3, among the various display units of the main control display device 53, only the ordinary symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

  When the game ball passes through the above-described operating port 68, the normal symbol display section 59 blinks, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in the form of a loss (a loss mode), after a predetermined stop time (fixed time of a general figure stop) elapses, if there is a ball in the subsequent operation port, the normal The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the process shifts to the next variable display as in the case of the loss, while the normal symbol previously stopped and displayed is displayed. According to the mode, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

  The number of reserves related to the ordinary symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the operating port 68 during the variation of the ordinary symbol, and indicates the number of ordinary symbol lotteries for which the variation display of the ordinary symbol has not been executed yet. That is, when the symbol change performed earlier in the ordinary symbol storage and display unit 85 is not completed, the change start condition is not satisfied. When the symbol change is completed, the change start condition is satisfied, and A new symbol change is started based on the stored lottery result (holding lottery result). The upper limit of the number of reservations is four, and the storage of the number of reservations does not exceed four.

  The display of the four types of numerical values by the ordinary symbol storage display unit 85 is such that, for example, when the number of reservations is 0 (no reservation is made), both are turned off, and when the number of reservations is 1, either one is turned on. This can be performed in such a manner that the other is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, both are lit, when the number of reservations is three, one of them is lit and the other is blinked, and when the number of reservations is four, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

  The display of the number of reserved first special symbols by the first special symbol storage and display unit 83 is performed by displaying four types of information using two LED indicator lamps as one set. The display of the number of reserved second special symbols by the second special symbol storage and display section 84 is also performed by displaying four types of information using two LED indicator lamps as one set.

In the case where the above-mentioned right-handed game situation is reached, the display is performed in a predetermined manner using the third state display unit 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In the present embodiment, the third state display unit 86c is set to be turned off when the game state to be left-turned is left-handed, and to be turned on when the game state is to be right-handed.
<Structure of effect display device and basic display contents>

  Subsequently, a configuration of the above-described effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In the present embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15-inch) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, another effect display such as an effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 or a story display is performed. In the effect display device 60, various images are displayed. Here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 as shown in FIGS. A fluctuating effect accompanied by fluctuating display of a symbol (also referred to as “decorative symbol”) 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 includes a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. In the following, the effect symbols 190a to 190c in the middle left and right may be described as “effect symbols 190” and “effect symbols 190a to 190c” depending on the situation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 has seven types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “7”. In addition, here, the description will be given using seven types of element symbols having the meanings of the numerals “1” to “7” so that the description is not complicated, but the element symbols are, for example, predetermined words and the like. It is also possible to adopt a design having a meaning other than numbers, such as Furthermore, it is also possible to use, as the element symbols, those having the meaning of numbers and those having other meanings. In addition, in order to execute a special effect (a pseudo continuous notice or a special zone effect described later), an effect that appears only when a certain change occurs (usually added to a symbol or displayed by replacement) is performed. The special symbol for this is also included in the effect symbol 190 in a broad sense.

  Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scroll), and the above-described element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Is executed by In addition, as a scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, various modes such as a horizontal direction, rotation, or turning, in addition to a vertical direction, can be adopted.

  The effect symbol 190 may form a so-called “reach” combination in the middle of the variable display. In the “reach”, two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are symbols having the same numbers such as “7” and “7”, and have the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is constituted by symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this “reach”, the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of reach is in a state where the combination cannot be constituted with another effect symbol. Has become.

  In addition, as a display mode of the effect symbol 190, various types of “reach” and other various modes can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and details thereof will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another type of display such as a mechanical drum or an LED display is used. It may be something. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by combining an additional display body with a plurality of display bodies.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member, and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In such a case, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to the setting change function>

  Next, a configuration relating to the above-described setting change and a method of changing the setting will be described. FIG. 5A is a partially enlarged view showing a state in which the main substrate 102 is accommodated in a transparent substrate case 801, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. It is schematically shown on an enlarged scale. In FIG. 5A, a substrate case 801 is formed of a colorless and transparent plastic material in a box shape having a divided structure (for example, a two-part structure).

  As a divided structure of the substrate case 801, for example, a structure in which a cover body is combined with a substrate holder that holds the main substrate 102 and the substrate holder and the cover body are connected via a caulking structure that leaves a trace upon separation. Can be adopted. In the board case 801, a connector 802 (only a part is indicated by a reference numeral) used for connection with another device such as the sub-main board 301 and the like is formed in a size such that a gap is not generated as much as possible. Exposed from the opening.

  The main board 102 is visible through the transparent board case 801. In FIG. 5A, the CPU (main CPU) 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the setting display 807 described above, and the input The ball status indicator 808 is indicated by a broken line, and other devices are not shown. Of these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area where the test terminals are mounted only when performing a ball test or the like in a product test stage, and the test terminals are mounted on the main board 102 in the mass production stage. Not.

  The above-mentioned setting display 807 displays the selected set value only when setting is changed or when setting is confirmed. The setting indicator 807 displays the current setting of the set value for changing the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device (the operation probability of the device for continuously operating the special electric accessory, so-called big hit probability). The value can be displayed. Further, a 7-segment display for one digit is used for the setting display 807. Here, in the present embodiment, although not shown, a dot display section is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

  A setting key cylinder (also referred to as “setting key switch”) 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as “setting change switch”) 810 are arranged near the setting display 807. A setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. The setting change operation unit 811 opens the setting change opening / closing lid (hereinafter referred to as “opening / closing lid”) 812 of the board case 801 as shown in FIG. It is exposed as shown.

  The opening / closing lid 812 is formed, for example, integrally with the board case 801 via a resin hinge, and pulls the protruding knob 813 with fingers to open it as shown by arrow B while resisting elastic force. Can be exemplified. When closing the opening / closing lid 812, the lid 810 is folded down from the state shown in FIG. 5B (not shown), and the free end side is locked to the substrate case 801.

  The above-mentioned ball entry state display 808 is used as a performance display section of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and can display a base (a value of the number of prize balls per number of shots) for each game state. In the present embodiment, a four-digit 7-segment display is used as the entry state display 808 as shown by a solid line in an enlarged manner at a lower right portion in FIG. 5A. In addition, a dot display (not shown) is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display of each digit of the entry state display 808.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the entry state display 808, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 are wrapped in a plan view (the rear view of the gaming machine). They are arranged so that they do not overlap (do not overlap). In addition, the entry state indicator 808 and the setting indicator 807 are arranged at an interval of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more) so that misrecognition of the display can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5B is the free end when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened, and the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end. In this way, while changing the set value can be easily performed, the entry state indicator 808 is arranged on the rotating shaft (fixed end) side when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened. When the gaming machine frame is opened, the display information is prevented from being unintentionally visually recognized by the player. Of course, if priority is given to prevention of fraud when changing the set value, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 should be formed on the right side of the main board 102 as viewed from the front (the rotating shaft side of the gaming machine frame 11). I just need.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above points, an opening / closing lid 812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting change operation unit 811 cannot be easily accessed, and The configuration change operation unit 811 is configured not to be exposed except in the case of a change operation, a check operation of setting information, or the like. Hereinafter, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the upper surface portion of the board case 801 in a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 is designed so that a setting key (key) can be inserted into a setting key insertion slot (symbol omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. An opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, since a partition wall such as a side wall is formed from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main board 102, other electronic components (for example, the CPU 501) of the main board 102 cannot be accessed via the opening 816. Has become. In addition, a setting key cylinder 809 having a setting key insertion port (symbol omitted) corresponding to the opening 816 and a push-type setting change button 810 are arranged vertically when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, an opening / closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable and closable while being urged in a direction to always close the opening 816.

  Next, a brief description will be given of an operation method of setting change and the like and an outline of the operation of setting change and setting display. When confirming the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and the set key cylinder 809 is opened. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and turn the key to the right. Then, without pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. With this operation, the current setting value (for example, a corresponding numerical value if the setting value range is “1” to “6”) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is displayed. Some segments (here, dot portions) are driven to light to indicate that there is. In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is activated (for example, a state in which control based on an input relating to the progress of the game, such as detection of winning of a winning opening, can be performed), the setting value change processing is performed. Is configured to not be possible.

  On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power is turned off by operating the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2), and then the opening / closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force. A setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion slot of the cylinder 809, and the key is rotated rightward. Then, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again while pressing the initialization switch 544 to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value blinks on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and some segments (dot portions in this case) are turned off (turned off) to indicate the setting change mode. Is displayed.

  In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new set value obtained by incrementing the current set value by +1 is temporarily stored, and the stored set value is displayed on the setting display 807. The manager in the game arcade operates the setting change button 810 so as to have an arbitrary (target) setting value. In this embodiment, if the set value at power-on is “1”, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once, “1”, “2”,..., “5”, “6”, “1” ".

When the key inserted into the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated to the left in a state where the setting is changed to an arbitrary setting value (an arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807) by operating the setting change button, the setting is performed. After the change process is completed, the current setting value is lit on the setting display 807 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and some segments (here, dot portions) are lit and displayed. And the dot are turned off.
<Structure of effect display device and basic display contents>

  Subsequently, a configuration of the above-described effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In the present embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15-inch) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, another effect display such as an effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 or a story display is performed. In the effect display device 60, various images are displayed. Here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 as shown in FIGS. A variable display of the symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 includes a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c.

  Further, in this embodiment, the left effect symbol 190a has nine types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “9”. Further, the middle effect symbol 190b and the right effect symbol 190c, which are the other effect symbols, also have nine types of element symbols meaning numbers “1” to “9”, like the left effect symbol 190a. The details of the above element design will be described later.

  Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scroll), and the above-described element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Is executed by

  The effect symbol 190 may form a so-called “reach” combination in the middle of the variable display. In the “reach”, two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are symbols having the same numbers such as “7” and “7”, and have the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is constituted by symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this “reach”, the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of reach is in a state where the combination cannot be constituted with another effect symbol. Has become.

  In addition, as a display mode of the effect symbol 190, various types of “reach” and other various modes can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and details thereof will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another type of display such as a mechanical drum or an LED display is used. It may be something. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by combining an additional display body with a plurality of display bodies.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member, and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In such a case, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine>

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main components of the electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub main board 301, and the like. The power supply board 251 is connected to the payout control board 103, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 106, the launch control board 107, and the like. Further, the main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via a frame relay terminal plate 108. The main board 102 is connected to a main symbol display board (also referred to as a “symbol display board”) 256 constituting the main control display device 53 and a sub-main board 301. , The above-mentioned sub-sub-board 302 is connected.

  The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). The power supply board 251 is connected with a frame effect connection board 300 and a game ball rental device connection terminal plate (not shown). Of these, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate (not shown) has a ball attached thereto. A ball operation board or the like used for coin operation is connected.

  A touch switch 310 provided on the firing handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20) is connected to the above-described firing control board 105. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected to a firing touch lever and a grounding lock. The touch switch (also referred to as a “touch sensor”) 310 detects the contact when a player or a game clerk touches the firing handle 20 with a finger (FIG. 20B), and changes the form of an output signal. Change.

  Further, the firing control board 105 is connected with a firing intensity volume 311, a firing stop switch 312, and the above-described firing device 43. The firing intensity volume 1311 of these is used to change the firing intensity of the game ball according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20. The firing stop switch 312 is used to stop the firing by detecting an operation on a part of the finger (such as the thumb) holding the firing handle 20.

  The power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control display device 53, pass detection devices 69a and 69b, and a normal motor combination are provided on the main board 102 via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board, which are not shown. Object solenoid 76, first start winning detection device 74, second start winning detection device 75, general winning detection device 73, large winning detection device 78, large winning opening (open) solenoid 80, and a magnetic sensor or a radio wave sensor (illustrated) , Etc.) are connected. Here, in this embodiment, the connection of the first start winning detection device 74 and the second start winning detection device 75 to the main board 102 is performed directly without passing through the game board connection board or the game board relay terminal board. Is being done.

  The power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303. Furthermore, in addition to the frame connection board 303 and the frame effect connection board 300 described above, the sub main board 301 includes a glass effect connection relay board 305 and a glass effect connection board 306 via the glass effect connection board 306 for effects in the gaming machine frame 11. Each device is connected.

  Pachinko gaming machines 10 include each of the devices for staging such as frame illumination L2 substrate 317, frame illumination R2 substrate 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. Further, in this embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, a production button board, a lifting motor, a production button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, and the like are provided, but these are not shown in FIG. are doing.

  The sub-main board 301 is also connected to a game board device, an image display device, a voice control device, and the like. Among them, as a device for a game board, there is a board surface illumination connection board 331. The board surface decoration connection board 331 is connected to the sub main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. A center illumination board 332 used for illumination of the center decoration 64 is connected to the board illumination connection board 331. Although not shown, an effect sensor substrate, other illuminated substrates, an effect motor, and the like are also connected to the board surface illumination connection board 331. Although not shown, the effect interface board 304 is connected to various illumination boards and effect motors.

  The above-described image display device connected to the sub-main board 301 includes a sub-sub board (image control board) 302. The sub-sub board 302 has a liquid crystal unit (both a liquid crystal module and a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. 42) are connected. Here, in the present embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the effect interface substrate 304 via the image display connection B substrate is also provided. The above-described audio control devices connected to the sub-main board 301 include an audio control board (audio board) 339 and an audio ROM (ROM) board 340.

  Next, the configuration of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, on the main board 102, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) with resin packaging can be used. Note that the “ROM” and “RWM” described in the present embodiment are of a general concept including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

  Although not shown, the CPU device mounted on the main board 102 includes, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number. And a random number circuit. Among these, the random number circuit for the 16-bit random number and the random number circuit for the 8-bit random number are for generating a hardware random number which is a built-in random number.

  Further, the main board 102 is provided with an input / output port 505 for inputting / outputting data to / from a device external to the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit sections such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

  The above-mentioned ROM 502 stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. In addition, when the CPU 501 executes the game program, the RWM 503 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the processes, and the like.

  Subsequently, on the payout control board 103, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) with resin packaging can be used. In addition, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform payout processing, predetermined control data, and the like. In addition, when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501, the RWM 513 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the processes, and the like.

  The above-described sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. . The input side of the input port 527 is connected to the output side of the main board 102, and the output side of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, and the like.

  The CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on an effect control command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main substrate 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RWM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes the various programs. Memory.

  The transmission and reception of data between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 are performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since one-way communication is maintained between the main board 102 and the sub main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to on the sub main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub main board 301. In order to enable such one-way communication, for example, a communication restricting unit (such as a buffer circuit) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub main board 301 is performed by the communication restricting unit. It is possible to do via

  The sub-sub board 302 includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The input side of the input port 538 is connected to the output side of the sub main board 301, and the output side of the input port 538 is connected to devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533.

The above-mentioned video memory 540 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and rewrites the content of the image data in the video memory 540 to display the content (frame image) of the effect display device 60. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timing of each of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Then, the effects are displayed on the effect display device 60 with the symbols superimposed in the order of the layers in which the priorities are determined in advance.
<Power supply and data backup>

  The power supply board 251 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like via a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside, and supplies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, and the like to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, And supply to other predetermined devices.

  The initialization switch circuit unit 543 provides an initialization signal for clearing backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power is turned on, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by a game shop manager. Is provided. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can retain (back up) stored data even when power supply to the power supply board is cut off. When the initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, data (backup data) backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 is restored. Cleared. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the state changes to the setting change state according to the input state of the initialization switch 544 and the input state of the setting key at the time of power-on. The presence / absence of initialization, the range of initialization, and the like can be determined according to the signal from the initialization switch circuit unit 543 and the input signal related to the setting key.

  The initialization switch 544 is divided into a switch for the main board 102 and a switch for the payout control board 103 so that the backed-up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. It may be. Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated at power-on, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the payout initialization switch (not shown).

  As described above, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 to the RWM 503 in the main board 102 even after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is shut off, so that the data can be held (backed up). That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. The backup area 503a is provided with a stack pointer at the time of power interruption when a power interruption (including a so-called momentary interruption caused by an instantaneous voltage drop) or the like occurs. , An area for storing values of registers, I / O, and the like. Then, with the normal power-on and the elimination of the power failure, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power-off based on the information of the backup area 503a.

  Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by a power-off process (described later), and restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is executed in a power-on process when the power is turned on (described later). . As the backup area 503a, an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply can be used.

  Also, as with the RWM 503 of the main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 to the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, so that data can be held (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. The backup area 513a stores a stack pointer at the time of power interruption, values of registers, I / O, and the like when the power is interrupted due to a power failure or the like (when a power interruption occurs). Area. Then, with the normal power-up or the elimination of the power failure, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area 513a.

  The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power cutoff processing in the payout control board 103, and the values written in the backup area 513a are restored when the power is turned on. Control start process). As in the case of the main board 102, an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power supply can be used as the backup area 513a.

  The above-mentioned main board 102 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power interruption signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors a DC stable (for example, 30 volt) voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251 and the voltage becomes lower than a predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption) is detected, and the above-described power interruption signal is output. Based on the input of the power-off signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power-off process.

  Note that the electrical characteristics of the main substrate 102 and the like are such that even after the DC stable voltage becomes lower than the predetermined voltage at which the power-off signal is output, a sufficient time for performing the predetermined process such as the power-off process is obtained. During this time, the output of a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be separately supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 by another system. You may make it.

  Further, the above-described power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 can be arranged in a part other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply substrate 251, and a power interruption signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each substrate on the power supply substrate 251. Further, it is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the function of the power supply board 251 may be performed by the main board 102. In this case, the power supply unit 541 may be formed on the main substrate 102.

  Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output a power-off signal and perform a power-off process based on the power-off signal. Alternatively, of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506, and the power off signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

  Here, the main CPU 501, the payout CPU 511, and the like are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. In addition, the trigger of the execution of the power-off processing includes a hardware-type that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-down signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. In a periodic interruption process based on the setting, there is a software-based process in which a power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected is confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, the power-off processing is performed based on a hardware trigger by the NMI. The signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting a power interruption signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when a power interruption signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 but also when noise is mixed into a signal line connected to the NMI terminal. The transition to the power-off processing can be performed based on a software method as described later as another embodiment. Further, it is also possible to set a power-off flag based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal to trigger execution of power-off processing. Here, the data backup is performed by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the data backup of the storage area is performed by the sub main board 301, and the main It is also possible to perform data backup similarly to the board 102 or the payout control board 103.

  Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of the present embodiment performs various functions such as, for example, ball entry determination, lottery, and command transmission, by the operations of the above-described components (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 6 shows typical functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub-main board 301, and the sub-sub board 302. Among them, the main board 102 includes a ball entry determining unit 110, a first lottery unit 111, a second lottery unit 112, a general drawing lottery unit 113, a hold control unit 114, a main display control unit 115, a special game control unit 116, Specific game control means 117, opening / closing control means 118, prior information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102, by these functional means, as described below in order, a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a normal symbol, hold control, main control display, special game, specific game, opening and closing control, advance information Execute notification.

The above-mentioned ball entry determining means 110 is provided with sensors or the like provided in each of the winning ports (operating ports, various starting winning ports, large winning ports, general winning ports, out ports, etc.). Is determined on the basis of the signal output from.
<< Prize winning lottery function for special symbols >>

  The above-mentioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on a ball entering the first starting winning opening 62. The first lottery means 111 has functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121, a first success / failure determination means 122, a first symbol determination means 123, and a first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7).

  Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125, a second winning / failing determination means 126, a second symbol determination means 127, and a second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display section 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

  The first lottery value acquiring means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above, when the ball enters the first starting winning opening 62, changes the value of the big hit random number according to the first lottery to the first winning / rejecting lottery value. To get as Further, the second lottery value acquiring means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above, when the ball enters the second starting winning opening 63, changes the value of the big hit random number related to the second lottery to the second hit / fail status. Get as a lottery value.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / decreasing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / decreasing lottery value are hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). It is generated by the used operation (addition). As the hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit is used, and as the software random number, a value updated every interrupt by a random number generation program in software is used. Note that any one of a hardware random number and a software random number may be used.

  The first success / failure determination means 122 in the first succession lottery means 111 performs a success / failure determination based on the first success / failure lottery value, and determines whether or not the first success / failure lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (hit value) serving as a hit. Judge. Similarly, the second determination unit 126 in the second lottery unit 112 performs a determination as to whether or not the second determination unit 126 determines the winning or failure based on the above-described second determination unit. Determine whether this is the case. In the win / fail determination by the first win / fail determination unit 122 and the second win / fail determination unit 126, a win / fail determination table (for example, FIG. 9 (FIG. 9)) that defines the correspondence between the first win / fail lottery value or the second win / fail lottery value and the jackpot lottery result. a)) is used. Here, the normal-time probability-change big hit shown in FIG. 9 (a) indicates a random value range that always becomes a big hit, and the probability-change big hit is a random value range that becomes a big hit only when the probability changes. It is shown that.

  The first symbol determination means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determination means 127 in the second lottery means 112 are used in a case where one of the big hits is won in the big hit lottery relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , The type of the special symbol is determined based on the big hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery defines a relationship between a symbol lottery value, which is a random value (symbol random number) related to the symbol determination, and the type of the special symbol.

  Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a “symbol random number per special symbol” or a “symbol random number” related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of winning includes a small hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 perform special operations when a small hit is won in a large hit lottery for a special symbol. The type of the symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10C).

  The symbol lottery value is obtained when the player enters the starting winning opening, in the same manner as the above-mentioned winning / losing lottery value. The type of the special symbol is associated with the type of the hit, and the type of the big hit and the presence or absence of the small hit are determined in association with the obtained symbol lottery value.

  The first pattern deciding means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern deciding means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the special pattern variation pattern in the corresponding special symbol display section based on the special figure variation pattern table. decide. The special figure variation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure variation patterns and a pattern lottery value that is a random value (variation pattern random number) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  The pattern lottery value is acquired upon entry of a ball into the starting winning opening, in the same manner as the above-mentioned winning / losing lottery value. Further, the variation patterns according to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are, for example, according to various game situations such as a big hit, a losing time, the presence or absence of a reach, the presence or absence of time saving, the number of holdings, the number of changes after the big hit, and the like. A plurality of different special figure variation pattern tables are provided.

  The variation pattern relating to the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the start of the variation to the stop in the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure variation pattern defines various lengths of variation time, for example, from one second or less to several tens of seconds depending on the type. That is, in each of the special figure fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation time is determined as the end condition of the fluctuation display, and in the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 7), the special time is determined. When the variation display of the symbol is started and a specified variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  For many of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected during the time reduction, the fluctuation time is set shorter than that of the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected during the non-time reduction. However, special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected when non-hours are short and the number of reservations is four include those that have a shorter fluctuation time than a specific special figure fluctuation pattern during the time reduction. I have.

Further, in the present embodiment, most of the variation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as the time of a probability variation have an extremely short variation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). In such a situation, a special symbol change display and an effect accompanying the change are executed based on a change pattern of a very short time.
<< Relationship between the random number and the set value of the special symbol >>

  Next, the relationship between the random number for the special symbol and the set value will be described. FIG. 9A shows the random number for the set value “1” among the set values “1” to “6” in the present embodiment. Regarding the success / failure random number table of the set value “1” shown in FIG. 9A, the big hit value at the normal (probability) time in the random number value range “0 to 65535” for both the first lottery and the second lottery Is "0 to 205". Further, in the normal state, the random number range “206 to 64875” is an outlier for both the first lottery and the second lottery.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability (at the time of probable change), “206 to 615” is a big hit value in both the first lottery and the second lottery. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number range “616 to 64875” has a deviation value in both the normal time and the probability change time. Further, in each of the first lottery and the second lottery, the random value range “64876 to 65535” is a small hit value in both the normal time and the probable change.

  FIG. 12 shows the hit values for each set value in a list. Among these, as for the set value “1”, as shown in FIG. 9A, “0 to 205” is a normal big hit value. For this reason, the number of random numbers is 206, and the jackpot probability at normal time is 1/318 (≒ 206/65536). On the other hand, for the set value “2”, the big hit value in the normal state is “0 to 206”. Therefore, the number of random numbers is 207, and the jackpot probability at normal time is 1/317 (≒ 207/65536).

  Further, with respect to the set value “3”, the big hit value in the normal state is “0 to 207”. Then, the number of random numbers is 208, and the jackpot probability at normal time is 1/315 (≒ 208/65536). With respect to the set value “4”, the big hit value at normal time is “0 to 208”. Then, the number of random numbers is 209, and the jackpot probability at normal time is 1/314 (≒ 209/65536).

  As for the set value "5", the jackpot value at normal time is "0 to 209". Then, the number of random numbers is 210, and the jackpot probability at normal time is 1/312 ($ 208/65536). As for the set value “6”, the big hit value at normal time is “0 to 210”. Then, the number of random numbers is 211, and the jackpot probability at normal time is 1/311 (≒ 211/65536). As described above, the range of the big hit value is determined so that the larger the set value is, the higher the big hit probability becomes.

  At the time of high probability, the jackpot value is “0 to 615” for the set value “1”, and the jackpot probability is 1/106. For the set values “2” to “6”, the big hit values are “0 to 618”, “0 to 621”, “0 to 624”, “0 to 627”, and “0 to 630” in order. The approximate jackpot probabilities are “1/106”, “1/105”, “1/105”, “1/104”, and “1/104” in that order.

  Here, the reason why the approximate jackpot probability includes the same value such as “1/105” or “1/104” is that the decimal point numbers are rounded to represent the jackpot probability. In the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value is determined so that the larger the numerical value of the set value is, the higher the probability of the big hit becomes. The magnification of the probability between the low probability and the high probability is "3 times" for all the set values, and is common.

  Regarding the small hit, the random number range is “64876 to 65535” regardless of the set value in both the normal time and the high probability. Therefore, the occurrence probability of the small hit is 1/99 in each case regardless of the probability state and the set value. Further, in the example of FIG. 12, the design values of the payout rate are 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values “1” to “6”, respectively.

  In the examples of FIGS. 9A and 12, “0”, which is the minimum value of the numerical range, is set as the big hit value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “0” may be excluded from the big hit value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud in the case where a fraudulent attempt is made to intentionally minimize the pass / fail random number updated by, for example, resetting the power supply. Further, it is possible not to assign “0” to the small hit, or to not assign the maximum value (here, “65535”) to the big hit or the small hit.

In the present embodiment, a preliminary determination (so-called pre-read) is performed on the result of the lottery performed using the random number shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 12. It will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<< Various lottery functions for ordinary symbols >>

  Next, the above-described ordinary drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The general figure lottery means 113 includes a general figure lottery value acquiring means 129, a general figure right / wrong determining means 130, a general figure design determining means 131, and a general figure pattern determining means 132. Then, when the passing of the game ball in the operating port 68 is detected by the above-mentioned ball entry determining means 110, the general figure lottery means 113 executes a lottery (general figure lottery) related to the ordinary symbol based on the detection result. I do.

  In this general figure lottery, the general figure lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires a general figure lottery value which is a random number (general figure random number) related to the ordinary symbol, and the general figure determination means 131 obtains the general figure determination table. Referenced. In the general symbol determination table, the correspondence between the general symbol lottery value and the type of the ordinary symbol is defined. Then, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol linked to the universal drawing lottery value corresponds to the hit by the universal symbol lottery determining means 130, and if it corresponds to the hit, the type of the hit is determined. Is done.

  In addition, a general figure pattern lottery value is acquired at the opportunity of entering the operating port 68, and the general figure pattern determining means 132 uses the acquired general figure pattern lottery value to change the general pattern variation pattern (general pattern fluctuation pattern). ) Is determined. Each general pattern fluctuation pattern is associated with a general pattern lottery value that is a random number (general pattern fluctuation pattern random number) related to the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and is linked to the obtained general pattern fluctuation lottery value, and the game status The normal pattern fluctuation pattern according to is determined.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the general figure lottery value and the general figure pattern lottery value, which are random numbers related to the ordinary symbols, are created using only software random numbers.
<< Function for holding special symbols >>

  Subsequently, the above-described hold control unit 114 will be described. The holding control unit 114 includes a first holding unit 133, a second holding unit 134, and a general-purpose holding unit 135. Among these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined change start condition relating to the first special symbol is not satisfied when a new entry to the first starting winning opening 62 is made. The information (first special figure hold storage information) relating to the various random numbers (the first winning / failure lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the like) is temporarily stored on hold. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the suspension for the first special symbol is set to four, and the suspension for the first special symbol is possible within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

  The change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been executed when the above-mentioned ball has been entered is finished, and further, the first special symbol or the second special symbol generated before the above-mentioned ball entry. If there is no suspension related to the first special symbol, the variation start condition relating to the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol variation relating to the first special symbol is permitted.

  Regarding the above-mentioned second holding means 134, if a predetermined ballistic change start condition relating to the second special symbol is not satisfied when a ball is newly entered into the second starting winning opening 63, the ball is acquired by the ball entry. The information on the various random numbers (the second winning / losing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol, which has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered, is completed, the variation start condition relating to the second special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol variation relating to the second special symbol is established. Will be allowed. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four as in the case of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol and the second special symbol described above, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and the special game is controlled, the change start condition is determined after the special game is finished.
<< Function for holding ordinary symbols >>

  Next, the above-mentioned ordinary drawing holding means 135 will be described. If there is a ball in the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1) and the predetermined fluctuation start condition for the ordinary symbol is not satisfied, the general figure holding means 135 generates a random number (general figure lottery) acquired by the general ball. (For example, value) is temporarily stored on-hold. Until the change start condition is satisfied, the change display of the ordinary symbol related to the above-mentioned ball entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the holding of the ordinary symbol is set to four, and the holding of the ordinary symbol is possible within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

When the change display of the ordinary symbol, which has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered, ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory is not operated, the variation start condition relating to the ordinary symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol relating to the ordinary symbol is established. A simple design change is permitted.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

  Next, the main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 has a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a general figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among these, the first special symbol control means 136 causes the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 7) to change the first special symbol according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. A display (for example, a blinking display in which a predetermined part of the LED display lamp blinks every 100 msec) is performed. Then, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 70 at the determined symbol after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

  Further, the second special symbol control unit 137, according to the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, if the variation start condition relating to the second special symbol described above is satisfied, the second special symbol display unit 71 ( In FIG. 7), the second special symbol is changed and displayed. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 71 at the determined symbol after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

  In addition, if the change start condition relating to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is satisfied, the ordinary symbol control unit 138 will follow the ordinary symbol variation pattern determined by the ordinary symbol lottery means 113 and display the ordinary symbol display unit 59 (see FIG. 7). ), The normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the variation time determined by the variation pattern elapses, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 59 at the determined symbol.

Further, the hold display control unit 139 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol. The display of the number of these reservations is performed on the first special symbol storage display unit 83, the second special symbol storage display unit 84, and the ordinary symbol storage display unit 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Will be Further, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol, and various hold displays.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied when the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode when the big hit is hit, and the predetermined game corresponding to the type of the big hit as described above. A special game to be opened in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a special winning opening during the unit game) is executed.
<< Functions related to specific games >>

  Subsequently, the specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs the control related to the above-described probability change, time saving, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a certain change state, a time reduction state, or the like according to the type of the big hit. Probable change states are associated with some types of jackpots, but not all types of jackpots. Further, the probability change state of some of the big hits continues until the next big hit, and the other big hits with certainty changes continue until the total number of variable display times after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). . During the probable change state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than the normal time at the time of non-probability change.

  In addition, the time saving state is continued until the sum of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined end condition number (for example, 100 times) counted from the end time of the special game. Further, during the time saving, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 operate the variation pattern for the time saving so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than the normal state. Select

Further, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed at the same time as the time reduction is carried out as the specific game, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is facilitated, and the ball is placed at the entrance of the second start winning port. The opening and closing blades are easily opened. The opening and closing control of the opening and closing blades is controlled by opening and closing control means 118 described later.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

Next, the opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory (opening / closing blade) of the second starting winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90. When the ordinary symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the opening / closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 76 to open the ordinary electric auditors at the second start winning opening 63. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the special winning opening (opening) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the special winning opening device 90.
<< Functions related to advance information notification >>

  Next, the above-described advance information notifying unit 119 will be described. The advance information notifying means 119 is acquired when the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63 receives a ball, regardless of whether or not the symbol change display corresponding to the ball is held. A process for transmitting the information on the various random numbers as the advance notification information to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) is performed.

  The above-mentioned prior notification information includes the above-mentioned acquired each lottery value (the first lottery value or the second lottery value), each symbol lottery value (the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value), and each pattern Information such as what kind of winning / falling range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to can be exemplified.

By transmitting such advance notice information, various prefetch effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. Examples of the pre-reading effect include a reservation notice and a continuous notice, and details thereof will be described later.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Next, the above-mentioned main command transmission means 120 will be described. The main command transmission unit 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 is performed including various information at various timings such as a start winning, a start of a special symbol change, a stop of a special symbol change, and a big hit. .
<Basic function of sub-board>

  Next, basic functions of the above-described sub-substrate 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub board 104 is composed of a sub main board 301 and a sub sub board 302, and performs various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the sub main board 301 includes a main command receiving unit 141, an effect pattern determining unit 142, a sub main command transmitting unit 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional units such as a sound control unit 144 for controlling a speaker output and the like and a light control unit 145 for controlling a game effect lamp output and the like.

  The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information for designating a display effect displayed on the effect display device 60 and a sound effect and a light effect performed in conjunction with the display effect as needed. During the fluctuation display of the symbol 190, an effect indicating the high degree of expectation of the big hit is executed. Here, “expectation” in the present embodiment can be rephrased as “reliability”. In the following, "expected degree" refers to the stage of production (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, fixed pattern) that enhances the expectation of becoming a big hit due to fluctuations when it appears among patterns of the same type of notice production, and one production When the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in collision fluctuation) information and the fluctuation pattern information (variation pattern in fluctuation fluctuation) that cause the occurrence of the variance are confirmed, the probability that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to one effect includes the fluctuation pattern is determined. The description may be used for each of the descriptions, and the “effect with a high degree of expectation” generally refers to an effect that often hits a great deal when the effect occurs.

  When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub-board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmitting means 143. The command transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the sub sub board 302 also includes sound information for reading sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with a sub-main command receiving unit 146, an effect execution control unit 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub-board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, thereby forming an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays an effect moving image.
<Specific mode example related to specific game>

Next, a specific mode of the specific game described above will be described. As described above, as special games, special symbol probability variation function (probable change), special symbol variation time reduction function (time saving), and easy ball entry game (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction) (Combination of function and opening extension function of ordinary electric accessory). Then, at least one of these various specific games is executed in accordance with the jackpot lottery result (a special symbol stop display symbol) or the game result during the jackpot. In the present embodiment, instead of the above-mentioned so-called ST machine, a specification in which a certain variable period is continued until the next big hit is adopted in some big hits, a specific mode of which will be described later.
<< Probability variation game >>

  The above-described probability change is to change the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of the big hit occurrence is higher than the normal probability state. In the pachinko gaming machine adopting the ST, the continuation period (probable change period) of the probable change state is determined based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

The number of times of the change of the special symbol is determined as one time from the change display of the special symbol to the stop display. Then, in the probability change period in ST, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). Such a function that allows the probable change period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as ST or a number cut probable change.
<< Fluctuating time shortening game >>

  The above-mentioned time savings substantially shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbols (the first special symbols and the second special symbols) on the main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. Here, "generally shorten" does not mean that it is shorter than the normal game in all cases, and in some cases, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equivalent to the normal game or is longer than the normal game Which means that According to this time saving, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if the winning in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63) is generated continuously, the special symbol is kept. The change display and the stop display of the symbol can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for the big hit lottery.

  Further, the duration of the time reduction state (time reduction period) is determined based on the number of times the special symbol has changed, similarly to the probability change state. In this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100).

  In the example described above, the probable change period and the shortening period are set to the same period, but the probable change period and the shortening period may be different from each other. For example, it is possible to set the probable change period to 104 times and the shortening period to 100 times. In addition, neither the probable change period nor the shortened period is limited to being constant. For example, it is possible to set the probable change period to one of four times, 25 times, 100 times, and the like according to the type of the big hit that has occurred. In addition, it is possible to set the time reduction period to any one of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, and the like according to the type of the big hit that has occurred.

  It is also possible to provide a so-called drop lottery function. The following can be exemplified as the drop lottery. For example, after the certainty change or the time saving reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) smaller than the above-mentioned maximum number of changes (here, 100 times), every time the special symbol changes until the maximum number of changes is reached, A lottery (special game end lottery) for determining whether to end the probable change or the reduction of time is executed. Then, when the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next fluctuation returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Further, it is not limited to executing both the probability change and the time saving, and it is also possible to execute only one of the specific games. For example, depending on the type of the hit jackpot, it is possible to provide only the time saving and not to give the probability change, or to not give the time saving but only the probability variation.
<< Easy ball entry game >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game will be described. This game for easily entering a ball is a game state in which a function related to a normal electric auditorium is set to the advantage of the player, and the opening mode of the second starting winning port 63 can easily receive a game ball more than usual. is there. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the control mode such as the time reduction related to the ordinary symbol, the probability variation related to the ordinary symbol, the extension of the opening related to the ordinary electric accessory, and the combination of these control modes may be used. The easiness of entering the starting winning opening 63 is enhanced, and an easy entry state is formed. In connection with this “Easy-to-ball game” and the aforementioned “base”, “electric support”, etc., in the following, “high base”, “high base state”, “low base”, “low base state”, “ Terms such as "non-electric support" are used. Hereinafter, the “low base state” corresponds to the “non-power support state”, and the “high base state” corresponds to the “power support state”.

  Of the above-described various control modes in the ordinary symbol, the time reduction related to the ordinary symbol is a control mode in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than the normal state, and the probability variation related to the ordinary symbol is the hit probability of the ordinary symbol. Is a control mode (probable change related to a normal symbol) that improves the normal state. Further, the extension of the opening related to the ordinary electric accessory is performed in a control mode in which the opening time of the second starting winning opening 63 is longer (long opening) than the opening (short opening) in the normal time (non-specific game). is there.

  As described above, the ball entry facilitation game during the specific game is entered into the second starting winning opening 63 by using three functions such as shortening the time of the normal symbol, changing the probability of the open lottery, and extending the open length of the ordinary electric accessory. Increases ball ease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63. Further, a configuration may be employed in which switching between a period in which at least one of the three functions is performed and a period in which at least one of the functions is not performed is performed according to a game state.

The continuation period of such a ball entry facilitation game can be determined based on a short time period relating to a special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the game for facilitating entry is continued during the time reduction related to the special symbol, and the game for facilitating entry is terminated when the time reduction related to the special symbol ends. In such a case, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol variation pattern) in which the symbol variation starts after the time reduction of the special symbol ends is provided for the ordinary time (at the time of the non-specific game). It can be determined from the fluctuation patterns that have been used.
<Main production on pachinko machines>
<< Basic display style of effect design >>

  Next, main effects of various effects performed by the sub main board 301 and the sub sub board 302 based on a command from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. First, a basic display mode of the above-described effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described.

  The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 with the special symbol being variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) with the special symbol being stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

  The stop symbol displayed along with the stop of the effect symbol 190 is constituted by a combination of three symbols of a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. When the result of the jackpot lottery on the main board 102 is a jackpot, a combination of three symbols, such as “777” or “555”, is a stop symbol representing the jackpot. Is displayed. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is unsuccessful, for example, one part or all of the effect symbols are rendered in a different combination from other effect symbols, such as “767”, “928”, “331”, etc. The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

  Here, “stop symbol” and “stop symbol” in the present embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are “fixed stop”. In other words, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while maintaining a combination of, for example, “767” and “928”, it is only “determined stop”. It does not correspond to what has been done. A state in which the effect symbols 190 do not reach the “fixed stop” while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a “temporary stop” state.

  As a display form of such a “temporary stop”, for example, a state where the effect symbol 190 is vibrating (swaying) little by little can be exemplified. Then, a mode of temporary stop in which the effect symbols 190 are wiggling little by little while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a "shaking fluctuation" mode or the like. Examples of the mode of the swing of the effect symbol 190 at the “temporary stop” include vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotation, and the like, and a movement range of about several millimeters.

  In addition, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “fixed stop”, a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination after a temporary stop state can be exemplified. Further, at the time of the “determination stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the determination has been stopped. Then, as the effect indicating that the final display has been made, the final stop state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or each of the final stop effect symbols 190a to 190c is displayed in a state where a special effect is added. And the like (symbol effect) or turning on an LED (lamp) provided in the center decoration 64.

  Here, as the symbol effect, each of the rendering symbols 190a to 190c is illuminated only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), the luminescent spot is circulated once or multiple times around each of the rendering symbols 190a to 190c, Various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, and moving the effect symbols 190a to 190c by several millimeters to return to the original position can be adopted.

  In addition, in the above-described “reach” display mode, there may be a case where an effect symbol maintaining a combination of reach is displayed in the above-mentioned “temporary stop” mode. Then, after the reach display by the “temporary stop”, the symbol that has been variably displayed (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) constitutes a combination of misses (combination of the miss reach) and “temporarily stops”. It is possible to exemplify an effect in which the “fixed stop” is performed and the variable display is ended while maintaining the state. Further, from the state where the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are performing "temporary stop" by the combination of the off-reach, the medium effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect has high reliability (the reliability of the big hit). (Relatively high degree) can be exemplified.

  Note that the scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-described vertical scroll, and various display modes can be adopted. As other display modes, for example, a horizontal scroll mode in a horizontal direction (from right to left, etc.), or a left effect symbol 190a to a right effect symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around a vertical axis. , A rotation mode of performing a variable display can be exemplified. In addition, for example, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are enlarged in the display area 194 from the back to the front, that is, from the back of the screen to the front, along a straight line trajectory or a curved (turning) trajectory. A display mode in which the images are sequentially fed out can also be exemplified. Further, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect symbol from the rear to the front falls from the upper side to the lower side.

  Further, the scroll mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed, switching from the predetermined scroll mode to another scroll mode is performed. It is also possible. Also, for a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to make the scroll mode different for each effect mode.

  FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle of the display area 194 in the vertical direction. There is only one line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of valid lines may be two or five.

Further, in FIG. 8 (b), the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are shown in a simplified manner using only predetermined characters, but the effect symbol 190 is illustrated in FIG. 33 (b). In addition, a combination of a part meaning a predetermined symbol such as a number (the above-described symbol element effect design element element design) and a part consisting of a pattern other than the predetermined symbol (the element symbol design which is a non-symbol element effect design) Can be constituted by And, as the portion composed of a pattern representing a symbol other than the predetermined symbol, various design images and portraits, and combinations thereof can be exemplified. It is also possible to use In the example of FIG. 33B, a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol.
<< Example of effect pattern >>

  Next, the above-described effect patterns will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, in the effect pattern, the mode of the effect including the effect symbol 190 is defined. More specifically, in the effect pattern, an effect process such as a change process from a change start to a change stop for the selected effect symbol 190 and a background and story development displayed in combination with the effect symbol 190 are defined. I have. Then, there are effects patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

  Among these, when the effect pattern of “with reach” is executed, a reach effect that becomes a big hit if one more effect symbol (here, medium effect symbol 190b) is arranged is performed on the effect display device 60. Then, when the result of the winning / rejecting lottery relating to the special symbol is a big hit, the display of the matching pattern such as “777” or “333” according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped. In addition, when the result of the winning / rejecting lottery relating to the special symbol is a loss, for example, a combination indicating a loss such as “767” or “515” is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been definitely stopped.

  Furthermore, when the effect pattern of "no reach" is executed, for example, a combination without reach, such as "928" or "331", in which the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are not a combination of reach, It is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped.

Some of these effect patterns have various lengths of fluctuation time, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of “with reach” includes a pattern that has a fluctuation time of several minutes. In the present embodiment, “no reach (about 3 seconds to 10 seconds)” and “normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds) in the variation pattern (see FIGS. 11A to 11C) related to the special symbol described above. Level), "super reach (reach with high jackpot reliability) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes)", an effect pattern without reach, an effect pattern of normal reach, and an effect pattern of super reach are provided. And, to these effect patterns, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern, and the number of effect patterns is wider than the above-mentioned variation patterns. Further, “super reach” can be rephrased as “SP (special) reach”.
<< Display of pending effects related to special symbols >>

  Next, a hold display (hold effect display) related to a special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a first reserved number display section 196 indicating the reserved number of the winning / rejecting lottery value in the first game, A second holding number display section 197 indicating the holding number of the winning / failure lottery value in the two games is displayed. Here, for the sake of simplicity of description and illustration, each hold display is represented by a perfect circle, but the hold display may be performed by other combinations of shapes and colors, character images, animations, and the like.

  In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is displayed on the first hold number display unit 196 described above. Further, when the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, four reservation displays are performed on the first reservation number display section 196.

  Further, the hold display in the first hold number display section 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first reserved number display section 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the rightmost part of the first reserved number display section 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, hereinafter, the hold displays performed from the first display position to the fourth display position are referred to as “hold 1”, “hold 2”, “hold 3”, and “hold 4”, respectively.

  For example, in the effect display device 60, while the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed, and no hold display is being performed on the first hold number display unit 196, a hold occurs. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position on the right end (the position of the above-mentioned “hold 1”). Then, at this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and "hold 2" to "hold 4" have not occurred. As described above, when the holding is further performed in the state where the “hold 1” is generated, the display related to the generated holding is performed at the position of the “hold 2” on the left side of the “hold 1”. Then, when “hold 1” and “hold 2” are displayed, and “hold 3” and “hold 4” are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, “hold 3” is displayed in accordance with the number of held holds. Or “Protection 4” is displayed.

  Then, if the fluctuation display that has been executed when the “hold 1” occurs is ended, and the other change start conditions relating to the first game are also satisfied, the above-mentioned hold storage information regarding the “hold 1” is displayed. At the stage of digestion, the hold display of “hold 1” moves to the right side of the first hold number display section 196. The change information display section 195 is provided on the right side of the first reserved number display section 196. The change information display section 195 is an area for displaying information (the change information) related to the change display being executed at that time. In other words, the hold display of “hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

  Here, when moving the hold display of “Hold 1” to the change information display unit 195, display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the examples of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is enlarged when the display of “hold 1” is changed to the change information display 198.

  As described above, when the hold display at “hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent hold display moves up, and “hold 2” shifts to the position of “hold 1”. Further, when "hold 3" and "hold 4" exist, "hold 3" is shifted to the position of "hold 2", and "hold 4" is shifted to the position of "hold 3". Then, when further suspension occurs in such a situation, “suspension 4” newly occurs, and the number of suspensions reaches the upper limit. If a new hold does not occur, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the standby order of each hold is raised.

  It should be noted that it is possible to broadly grasp the effect as a hold effect, including the state where the change information is displayed on the change information display unit 198 from the hold display in the “change 1” to the “change 4”, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the handling is performed such that the hold display in the “hold 1” to “hold 4” is set as the hold display, and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display. It is also possible.

  In addition, if the fluctuation display related to the effect symbol 190 is not performed and the number of suspensions is 0 and there is a ball in the first starting winning opening 62, the display of “Ba 1” is not performed (or displayed for a moment). Then, the change information display 198 is directly displayed on the change information display section 195. Only in such a case, it is also possible to perform such a treatment that the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the suspension display.

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned second reserved number display section 197 will be described, but the description of the same points as the first reserved number display section 196 will be omitted. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second hold number display section 197 is located on the opposite side of the first hold number display section 196 (the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned fluctuation information display section 195 interposed therebetween. ) Are arranged such that the relationship between “Maintenance 1” to “Maintenance 4” is symmetrical in a color different from the first reserved image.

  Further, the hold display can be performed in a mode according to various game states. For example, it is possible to exemplify a case where the state of the hold display is different when the control is performed in different effect modes when the jackpot lottery probability is the normal probability and the high probability.

Further, the positional relationship between the first hold number display section 196, the second hold number display section 197, and the fluctuation information display section 195 is not limited to the above-described one, and the second game is executed in the second game as in the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the type in which the special symbol and the effect symbol 190 are displayed in a variable order in the order of the occurrence of the start winning prize related to the first game and the second game instead of being executed in priority to the one game, Eight hold displays may be arranged on the left side of the 195.
<< Pending pre-production for special symbols >>

  Next, a reservation look-ahead effect that is one of the notice effects (a look-ahead effect) related to the special symbol will be described. This reserved look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-mentioned on-hold storage information (the first special-figure on-hold storage information or the second on-hold storage information). Furthermore, the hold look-ahead effect uses the function of the above-mentioned advance information notification, and a reach or a big hit occurs when the hold is performed after the effect performed using the effect design 190 or the like at that time. It is performed as a production that suggests the expectation of doing.

  For example, the hold display generated at the position of “hold 3” in the first hold number display unit 196 is different from the display (for example, blue) which is a basic display mode in which the hold is not changed, and is a green hold display. It is shown that the degree of expectation such as occurrence of reach is higher than that in the case of the normal blue mode. In addition to blue and green colors, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern are provided. Productions such as showing that the degree is high are being performed.

  Here, examples of the display mode of the “predetermined pattern” include an animal pattern such as a giraffe and a display mode including a predetermined character image. It is also possible to adopt not only the colors and patterns of the hold display, but also items other than perfect circles, person images, and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a pre-reading effect by combining the various display modes described above with the mode of blinking or emitting light. In addition, a hold that hits a prefetch effect including a hold prefetch effect can be referred to as, for example, “trigger hold”.

  The pre-reading effect related to the hold described above may be performed also in the second game. And regarding the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible to provide a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, or a predetermined pattern. Also, as the hold display related to the second game, it is possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle, a person image, or the like.

  Furthermore, the look-ahead effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as “hold change”. Examples of such “hold changes” include those that indicate a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold, those that indicate a change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, and the like. is there.

  Among these, as the one indicating the change of the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold is started and the hold display is started, the use of the hold progresses, and the hold display is, for example, “hold 2”, An example in which the hold display changes while proceeding to “hold 1” can be exemplified. Then, for example, when a hold occurs, the hold display is performed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of “hold 3”, and when the player moves to the position of “hold 1”, another color such as green is displayed. And so on.

  In addition, when the change information display 198 is applied to any of the first game and the second game, the hold display is changed from the basic color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, a predetermined pattern, or true. It may change to a display mode such as an item other than a circle or a person image to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

  Further, examples of the control mode relating to the above-mentioned suspension change include the following. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining an effect pattern of the hold change (hold change pattern) is performed. A hold change pattern table is used for the hold change pattern lottery. The hold change pattern table includes information on whether or not a hold change has been made, and what timing is required when a hold change is performed (when a hold change is present). Stipulates matters related to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is executed. Further, as the pending change pattern, a pattern for the first game and a pattern for the second game are defined.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of holds in “hold 1” to “hold 4” that have been hit by the hold change, it is possible to cancel one of the hold look-ahead effects. More specifically, for example, when “hold 4” occurs, the hold related to “hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any of the hold that has occurred earlier is If the suspension change pattern that changes to a rainbow color is hit, the suspension related to the above-mentioned “storage 4” can be exemplified such that the suspension change is canceled and not executed.

Further, for example, when “hold 4” occurs as in the above-described example, the hold related to “hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all the hold that has occurred earlier occur. However, if the change does not change to the rainbow color and changes only to green or the like, the change that has occurred earlier is canceled and not executed. At the time of performing the pending change, it is also possible to execute an effect that suggests that the pending change is performed (sometimes referred to as “suspended change suggesting effect”), and this point will be separately described later.
<< Continuous notice for special symbols >>

  Next, as another look-ahead effect pattern, a continuous announcement (continuous effect) related to a special symbol will be described. There are two types of continuous announcements: genuine ones and simulated ones. Of these, genuine continuous announcements mean continuous announcements over a plurality of variable displays related to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous announcement means an intermittent announcement effect (pseudo continuous announcement) as if there was a change in the special symbol a plurality of times for one change display related to the special symbol.

  As the above-mentioned “continuous notice”, for example, a character acting as a hero in a story of a production moves to a different room in order to reach a room which is the final destination for each change of a special symbol. Such a thing can be illustrated. In addition, as another mode of "continuous notice", a character acting as a hero fights against a different enemy and wins for each change related to a special symbol, aiming at the enemy to be the final goal. Can also be exemplified.

  Further, the aforementioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be performed based on advance notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received in the case where the “holding 3” has been suspended, the sub-main board 301 is set as the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the special symbol after the next. It is possible to select a content that includes a continuous notice over three variable displays.

  Then, when the hold of one time is exhausted and the hold of “ho 3” is shifted to the position of “ho 2”, the first first of the effect patterns related to the selected consecutive announcements The effect pattern according to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially consumed and the hold display moves from “Ho 2” to “Ho 1”, the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information display from “Ho 1” is performed. When the process moves to the section 195, the last third notice is executed.

  In addition, in the sub main board 301, the change pattern related to the change display executed at the time when the above-mentioned “hold 3” is held, or the “hold 2” or “hold 1” that has occurred before that. It is also possible to check such pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned “hold 3” is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with a high hit reliability is executed or a hit is generated among various information already stored. If there is information indicating that the effect pattern is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous announcement selected when the hold of “Hold 3” occurs. In addition, according to the degree of expectation of the holding of the “hold 3”, the continuous notice is not immediately performed from the next change. It is also conceivable that a continuous announcement covering fluctuations is made.

  In addition, as the above-described pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pseudo continuous notice”), the reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern related to the single fluctuation display of the special symbol. Such an example, an example in which a character repeats an act a plurality of times, an example in which a temporary stop and re-variation of the effect symbol 190 are repeated, and the like can be exemplified.

It should be noted that the contents of the continuous notice described above are merely examples, and various contents other than those described above can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<<< Direction design related to normal design >>

  Next, the effects related to the above-described ordinary symbols will be described. In this embodiment, the effect display for the ordinary symbols is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect relating to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. In the case where the effect display of the ordinary symbol is performed in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbol is displayed to such an extent that a loss and a hit type can be identified, for example.

  In addition, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display objects, the effect display device 60 includes a relatively large display object and a small display object (a plurality of display objects may be provided). It is possible. The large display can be called, for example, a "main display" or "main liquid crystal", and the small display can be called, for example, a "sub display" or "sub liquid crystal". Further, when the above-described relatively small display body is provided, the effect design (199) related to the ordinary design may be displayed on, for example, a small display body. In addition, for example, an LED display lamp, which is a set of two, may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device for a normal design.

In addition, when performing an effect using an effect symbol related to a normal symbol, it is possible to perform a hold effect display related to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of displays such as a large display and a small display, the effect hold display related to the normal symbol is, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, two sets of LED display lamps are provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, whereby the effect display of the number of reserves related to the ordinary symbols "1" to "4" is performed. Is also good.
<< Production related to limited frequency pattern >>

  Next, effects related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as “limited frequency pattern effects”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the effect pattern described above. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect that is set so as to be more likely to appear in a predetermined game state, corresponding to a variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern production is a production content showing a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern production, for example, in a specific variation during a time-saving game, a predetermined variation pattern is displayed on the main board. The one that is determined and necessarily produces a highly reliable reach can be exemplified.

Further, as the game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after the predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit, immediately after a large hit, or during a predetermined effect mode (probable change, During the time-saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, and the like. In addition, in addition to these, as a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of holds related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, four), or The case where it does not exist can also be exemplified. Further, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, the effect pattern to be executed is determined from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table using a limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time. Is to be selected.
<< Production using operation buttons >>

  Next, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect”) using the above-described operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) will be described. The operation button 22 is depressed by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player a feeling as if he / she participates in the effect of the game or the lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the process of changing the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), “Push” and “continuous tapping” are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 together with the symbol of the operation button 22. For example, a guide display for prompting an operation, such as characters such as "Let's hold" or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time, can be given.

  Further, as the button effects, when the player operates the operation button 22 in accordance with the above-described guide display, an effect in which a character makes a comment or an effect in which an ally character attacks an enemy character can be exemplified. In addition, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect members (601 to 603, etc.) are activated to notify the user of the reach. Further, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect, in which case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect members (601 to 603, etc.) are activated to stimulate expectations for a big hit. Can also be exemplified.

  Further, regarding the above-mentioned operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button effect. The button operation validity period is a preset fixed time.

  In addition, as the operation input device such as the operation button 22, various other types can be adopted. For example, an operation handle of a car, an operation lever of an aircraft, a model of a character, etc. (Figure) with a touch sensor added can also be used. In addition, it is also possible to provide an operation button and an operation lever or the like in a side-by-side manner, and to selectively use them according to the situation such as the effect content.

Further, as described above, the cross key 96 (FIG. 21) is provided near the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as a decision key or the like in a situation where environment setting or the like is performed. In the present embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is performed in a situation where the effect display device 60 is performing the variable display of the effect symbol 190 or the like or in a condition where the variable display is not performed. May be done.
<< Direction when a big hit occurs >>

  Next, a description will be given of an effect when a big hit occurs. In the event of a big hit, the production at the start of special game (demonstration of big hit), the production during special game (round production), the production at the end of the last round (demonstration at end of round), the production at the end of special game Direction (big hit end demonstration). Here, the performance of the big hit start demonstration described above is a performance during a period in which the attacker (big winning opening) is kept closed from the start of the execution of the big hit game (special game) to the start of the execution of the first round (unit game). The demonstration of the big hit end demonstration described above is performed during a period in which the closing of the attacker (big winning opening) from the end of the execution of the last round (unit game) to the end of the execution of the big hit game (special game) is maintained. It can be said that it is directing.

  When the above-described effect symbol 190 is fixed and stopped, a display indicating that a big hit is started is displayed with a sound such as a fanfare. As a display indicating that the big hit is started, a display of a big hit start demonstration screen shown in FIG. 38A can be exemplified. Furthermore, a right-handed guidance effect is executed as a batting instruction during a special game, and a content that guides the player to perform a right-handed operation by increasing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 can be exemplified. Further, as the display of the content for guiding the user to make a right-hand drive, a message such as "Turn the handle to the right" can be displayed in the right-hand drive guide display area 383 in FIG.

  Here, the effect content at the start of the big hit may be different between the initial hit (the big hit on the low base) and the extended villa (the big hit on the high base). Specifically, a display such as "Start big hit!" May be displayed at the time of the first hit, and a display such as "Continuous big hit!" In addition, for right-handed guidance, the message "Turn the steering wheel to the right" is displayed at the first hit, but such a message is not displayed or a different display (only "right-handed") May be displayed for a short time). In this way, the big hit start demonstration effect at the time of the extended holiday may be shorter than the big hit start demonstration effect at the time of the first hit. In that case, of course, the big hit start demonstration time is longer than the first hit time. It becomes shorter during the extended holiday. Similarly, the time value of the big hit end demonstration effect (big hit start demonstration time) may be shorter in the extended villa time than in the first hit. In addition, regarding the touch effect that can be performed during the big hit start demonstration described below, the content of the effect based on the initial hit and the consecutive play, or based on the number of consecutive play, and whether the execution of the effect is permitted or not. Can also be associated.

  Examples of the effects during the special game described above include a moving image having contents that cannot be viewed unless the player has won the big hit. At this time, a predetermined music is output from the above-described speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as the video during the special game, for example, a picture depicting a state in which a predetermined character in a play picture employed in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 10 fights a rival enemy or a state of enjoying fortune Can be exemplified. Here, FIG. 38 (b) illustrates a scene of a moving image in which two women fight against an enemy together as a moving image during a special game.

  The switching of the round during the special game is performed by, for example, “1R”, “2R”,..., “15R”, “1 round”, “2 rounds”,. Can be notified by such a display. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is also possible to display the number of occurrences of the big hit when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hit continues.

  In the display example of FIG. 38 (b), at the bottom of the screen, a reserved number display area 367 is displayed, which distinguishes the reserved numbers of the special figures 1 and 2 from each other. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38B, a reduced effect symbol display area 361, a round number display area 368, and a count number display area 369 are displayed. In the same manner, in the display example of FIG. 38 (b), the number of consecutive villas related to a plurality of jackpot games is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen by displaying “the first probability change” or “195 acquisitions”. , The number of acquired prize balls in the series are displayed.

  Here, not only the winning balls (by entering the special winning opening (90)) due to the game during the round are displayed as the number of obtained winning balls, but the same launch position as the special winning opening (90) ( A prize ball based on a ball entering a general winning opening (symbol omitted) arranged in the (firing direction) may also be displayed as the number of acquired prize balls. In the case where a so-called over prize (a prize ball exceeding a prescribed count in one round with respect to the grand prize winning port), which is an excess prize, occurs, an effect indicating or reporting the occurrence (for example, A sound output such as "Take!" Or a display such as "Nice!"

  Further, as an effect during the special game, for example, a specific effect (a specific effect during a hit) as shown in FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (a) to (c) can be performed. FIG. 38 (c) and FIGS. 39 (a) to (c) illustrate the win special effect screens A to D. These hit special effect screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or inserted as a branch point of the effect when the notification of the number of rounds or the promotion to the certainty change is performed during the big hit game. It can be used for such purposes. Note that the meanings and contents of the display examples of FIGS. 38C and 39A to 39C will be described later.

  Subsequently, examples of the above-mentioned effects after the special game include those related to the result of the effect contents during the special game. More specifically, contents in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the fight between the characters can be exemplified. Such an effect after the special game can be referred to as an ending effect.

  Further, examples of the effect after the special game include a display in which the number of consecutive big hits is additionally displayed and a display in which the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time is displayed. In addition, it is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of the big hits when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits continue. Further, with respect to the success of the big hits, when the number of occurrences of the big hits reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern which is not selected before that.

  FIG. 37C shows a screen display example at the time of the big hit end demonstration. At the time of the big hit end demonstration, characters such as "end" indicating the end of the big hit game are displayed. Further, a lower message display area 364 is displayed at the lower part of the screen, and a message "Switch to the customization screen by touching the steering wheel and change to the customization screen by turning on the effect button" is displayed. On the big hit end demonstration screen, it is also possible to display the number of obtained prize balls during a big hit game or a series of big hits. In the example of FIG. 37 (c), "big hits +1" and "acquisition number: 1500" are displayed in the lower left portion of the screen.

  In addition, if the type of jackpot includes a jackpot without a probability change, the notification of whether or not the probability will change after the end of the special game shall not be notified during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

  For example, when a special game of a total of 10 rounds is performed, an effect of not informing the player whether or not the player is hitting the certainty until the end of the eighth round is not performed. In the case where the player is hit, it is possible to employ an effect or a control mode in which an effect to that effect (specific effect during hit) is performed over one or a plurality of rounds.

  Similarly, in a pachinko machine including a jackpot without a probability change, before a special game starts, during a special game, or at a predetermined timing such as at the end of a special game, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area It is also possible to adopt an effect or a control mode in which is changed.

  In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a detection region for game balls (herein referred to as a “V ball entry device”) is added to a portion of the game region 52 (see FIG. 1) below the large winning opening. Provided. Further, at a predetermined timing, such as at the end of a special game, the V-ball apparatus is set to a state in which game balls can be accepted, and in this state, if a V-ball apparatus detects a game ball, the probability state thereafter becomes , For a predetermined period. When the game ball does not enter the V-ball device or when the game ball does not enter a predetermined area in the V-ball device, control is performed so that the probability state thereafter does not change to a certain state. To do.

  In addition, it is possible to give such a certainty change by entering a ball only as an effect. That is, when a big hit is determined to be a big hit with a certain change, the V-ball entry device is set to a state where game balls can be accepted at a predetermined timing. If a sorting mechanism is provided in the V-ball entry device and the player hits a jackpot with a certain change in advance, the game ball that has entered the V-ball device is guided to a certain-change area, and the player can make a certain change. The effect of having acquired is performed. If the player hits a jackpot without a probability change in advance, the game ball may be led to a non-probability (normal) area, and an effect to the effect that the player has acquired the probability change may be performed.

  Subsequently, examples of the above-mentioned effects after the special game include those related to the result of the effect contents during the special game. More specifically, contents in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the fight between the characters can be exemplified. Such an effect after the special game can be referred to as an ending effect.

  Further, examples of the effect after the special game include a display in which the number of consecutive big hits is additionally displayed and a display in which the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time is displayed. In addition, it is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of the big hits when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits continue. Further, with respect to the success of the big hits, when the number of occurrences of the big hits reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern which is not selected before that.

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, the effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit is not performed, or during the game after the occurrence of the small hit, it is the same as in the normal case, and it cannot be distinguished whether or not the probability is changing. It is conceivable to produce the contents.
<Examples of various directing effects>
<< Production by superposition of multiple production members >>

  Next, various specific effects that can be implemented in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described using examples. First, it is possible to perform the display of the effect display device 60, the display of the light guide plate 88 described above, and the effect by overlapping the movable effect members. This type of effect is a composite effect by positioning the movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display contents of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration and movement of the movable effect member.

  As an example, in a state where any of the movable effect members protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 is visible outside the movable effect member. For example, when an image of a burning flame is displayed on the effect display device 60, an effect of a combination in which the movable effect member performs light decoration or operation in front of the flame is executed. Further, in the light guide plate 88, for example, by performing an effect such that a pattern of a flame blinks or an effect of blinking a ripple-like pattern, a difference in the distance between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 is caused. Visual effects can be exerted.

  Further, in this state, by performing an effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 are displayed on the light guide plate 88. The player can be visually recognized while partially obstructing the game. Furthermore, by combining the change of the pattern display before and after the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment in which the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complicated manner. .

  Thus, with a limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60, a more complicated effect can be performed, and the effect can be diversified. Note that even when the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display is visually recognized by a movable effect member behind and a part of display contents of the effect display device 60. By setting the transmission state to the extent possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposition as in the case of the light guide plate 88.

  In addition, as a mode of using the light guide plate 88 or the transmissive liquid crystal display (hereinafter, referred to as the light guide plate 88 or the like), a mode in which the light guide plate 88 or the like is emphasized and a mode in which the effect display device 60 is combined are adopted. It is possible. The above-mentioned “mode in which the light guide plate 88 or the like is emphasized” performs color display in which a predetermined image is made to emerge by using a large part of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 or the like, and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind the display device. This is a display mode that minimizes the player's consciousness.

On the other hand, in the above-described “aspect in combination with the effect display device 60”, the ratio of the area of the light guide plate 88 or the like where the color display is performed is suppressed to a predetermined level, and the display of the effect display device 60 This is a display mode in which the player is conscious of the content, and presents to the player an effect obtained by combining display of the light guide plate 88 and the like and display of the effect display device 60. Then, in a predetermined case, an effect in a “mode in which the light guide plate 88 or the like is emphasized” is executed, and in another predetermined case, an effect in a “mode in combination with the effect display device 60” is executed. And so on.
<< Production using hold display >>

  Subsequently, various effects can also be exemplified as effects using the above-mentioned hold display. For example, a hold change suggestion effect indicating that a hold change is performed is exemplified, and the change information display 198 of the change information display section 195 shown in FIGS. The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the reserved color changes and the degree of expectation increases, such as “color change?”. Then, after the display of the state transition suggestion information, the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 may be changed to one that indicates a high degree of expectation, such as red or rainbow. I do.

  In addition, a display such as “color change?” Can be displayed as one of the eyes of roulette or one of the symbols on a rotating drum (reel). For example, information display such as “no change”, “color change?”, “Red”, and “rainbow” is adopted as a roulette eye or a rotating drum pattern. Display the drum object. Then, in the change information display unit 195, the display of “no change”, “color change?”, “Red”, and “rainbow” is sequentially changed, and the change information is displayed in a manner corresponding to the stopped information. 198 may be performed. Note that it is also possible to display a roulette or rotating drum object without deleting the fluctuation information display 198.

  Further, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when a hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. It may be possible to positively notify the user of the change or the fact that the pending change will occur immediately by displaying the pending change information such as "pending change", "red pending", "rainbow pending", etc. Can be Here, such display of the pending change information may be performed at the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the pending change information may be displayed in the first pending number display section 196 or the second pending number display section 197. May be performed in the vicinity of the hold display.

As described above, one or more types of pending change suggestion effects indicating that a pending change is performed are provided, and the rate of the pending change and the pending change are made depending on whether or not the pending change suggestion effect is performed and the type. It is also preferable that the degree of change (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red differs between the type A and the type B) is different. In addition, when there are a plurality of hold indications and a hold change can be made to a plurality of hold indications, it is not possible to know which change of the hold will be performed at the start of the hold change suggestion effect. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest from the viewpoint of whether the previously changed reservation changes further or whether the non-changed reservation changes.

  In addition, when performing the pending change suggestion effect, the timing of the pending change can be various timings during the symbol change. For example, when the hold change suggestion effect uses an area or an image object dedicated to the hold change suggestion, a plurality of start / ends at arbitrary timings which do not overlap with the period of the stoppage of the fixed stop of the decorative symbol (effect symbol). Timing can be set.

  On the other hand, when the holding change suggestion effect is not dedicated to the holding change suggestion, but is performed in conjunction with the decoration design change effect, for example, a pseudo decoration design that suggests the holding change using the display area of the decoration design A hold change suggestion effect that displays (for example, a “hold change symbol”) can be executed. In this case, the timing at which one or more rows of symbols are temporarily stopped and the timing at which a symbol to be stopped is announced can be set.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can be changed at the start of hold display or at the time of shift.
<Various commands sent from main board to sub main board>

  Next, main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. First, the command transmission timings are as follows: during initial screen display, during a customer waiting demonstration (standby demonstration), when a special symbol design starts to change, when a special symbol design is confirmed, when a special symbol design is confirmed, during a big hit demonstration, At the time of opening the big hit big win winning opening, at the time of big hit middle big winning opening closing, at the time of the hit end demonstration, at the time of the big hit end demonstration end. The display of the initial screen is a period from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 10 to the start of the customer waiting demonstration and the transition to the steady state. In addition, at the time of start winning, at the time of recovery from power interruption, and at the time of error detection, a command is transmitted in any case. Further, command transmission is also performed at the time of RWM clear.

  Among these, the commands for clearing the RWM include the effect display initialization, the effect LED initialization, and various error commands. The effect display initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect symbol on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command turns on a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying effects and the like in accordance with the state of the error.

  As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. The customer waiting demonstration command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demonstration and for erasing the sound.

  The command at the start of the symbol change of the special symbol includes the number of stored symbols 1, the number of stored symbols 2, the communication test 1, the communication test 2, the number of productions A to Z, the production selection status 0 to 2, the variation additional information, and the design 1 production There are commands for a pattern, a design 2 effect pattern, a design 1 character effect, and a design 2 character effect. The symbol 1 stored number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 stored number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of effects related to the effect according to the above-described limited frequency table, and the various commands in the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. Things. The fluctuation additional information command indicates information for adding an element (effect component) for suggesting, for example, a jackpot expectation degree in the effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Things. The design 1 character production command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the design of the first special design, and the design 2 character production command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the design of the second special design. is there.

  Commands for determining the symbol of the special symbol include commands for stopping a symbol 1 effect pattern and a symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect symbol 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

  The commands during the special symbol pattern determination are as follows: fluctuation time reduction frequency 0 (low probability), fluctuation time reduction frequency AZ (low probability), fluctuation time reduction frequency 0 (high probability), probability fluctuation ( Command up to a predetermined number of changes). These are for transmitting a command relating to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time saving number display, and the like.

  Commands at the time of the jackpot start demonstration include a symbol 1 jackpot start demonstration, a symbol 2 jackpot start demonstration, and a command for designating a launch position. The symbol 1 big hit start demo command and the symbol 2 big hit start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the big hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is for informing the launch position when the player is to strike a game ball by so-called left or right strike.

  The commands for opening the big hit middle and big winning prize opening gates include a command for a symbol 1 big hit middle demo 1 to 16 and a symbol 2 big hit middle demo 1 to 16 commands. These are for displaying an effect based on the big hit symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of closing the big hit winning opening, there is a big winning opening closing effect command. This is for displaying a special winning opening closing effect.

  The command at the time of the big hit end demonstration includes a command of a symbol 1 end demonstration and a symbol 2 end demonstration. These are for displaying a hit end demonstration effect based on the hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  Commands at the time of the start prize include a command of a hit notice (hit notice effect), a symbol notice (hit symbol notice effect), a change notice (pattern notice effect), a number of symbols stored in one symbol, and a number of stored symbols in two symbols. Each command of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice is a command (prefetch command) related to the above-described prefetch effect by the advance information notifying unit 157. The hit notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the random number, and includes information on the success or failure according to the lottery probability. The symbol announcement command is for transmitting a random number value range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of winning. Further, the change notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the change pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the change pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The command of the number of memorized symbols 1 and the number of memorized symbols 2 is for notifying the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, information such as the presence or absence of a pre-reading effect and the period as a result of the success / failure lottery is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by respective commands of hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice.

  Commands at the time of power interruption recovery include communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game state A to E for power interruption recovery, number of productions A to Z, production selection state 0 to 2, design 1 character production, design 2 character production, There are commands for the state after the power failure recovery, the special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, the special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, the designation of the firing position, errors a to d, the number of symbols 1 stored, and the number of symbols 2 stored.

  The commands of the communication test 1 and the communication test 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The commands in the power-off recovery game states A to E are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of power failure. The commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of effects related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1 character effect and symbol 2 character effect commands are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting a different command depending on whether or not hitting is being made. As the command in the special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery and the special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, a command corresponding to the state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, hitting, etc. is transmitted. It is for. The launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation, as described above. The errors a to d are for transmitting the presence / absence and type of the error. The command of the number of memorized symbols 1 and the number of memorized symbols 2 is for notifying the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

  Next, main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. Prior to the description, the terms “special electric accessory”, “conditioning device”, and “casual accessory operating device” used below will be described. Each of these represents a conceptual device in the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and the “special electric accessory” activates (opens) the special winning opening of the special winning opening device 90. Things. The “condition device” is activated when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol. Can be done.

The main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is a power-on processing shown in FIG. 14 (also referred to as “control start processing on the main board”), an initial setting processing shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. The setting change processing shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interruption processing shown in FIG. 17, the lottery determination processing shown in FIG. 18 (win / fail), and the power-off processing shown in FIG. 19 are executed on the main board 102.
<Process at power-on>

  The power-on process schematically illustrated in FIG. 14 is a control process that is started after a security check using the production code of the CPU 501 is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the power-on process, an initial setting process (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), a process related to a set value and the like are executed. The content of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

  After the initial setting process (S101), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear button (the RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated (S102). In this S102, if the RWM clear button has been operated (S102: YES), the RWM clear processing (S103) is executed, and the RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (the side of the sub main board 301). Is performed (S4). Further, information indicating that power-on has been normally performed (power-on normal information) is stored in the RWM (S105), and a timer interrupt is permitted (S106). By permitting the timer interrupt (S106), the game progress interrupt process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this case) becomes possible. Further, various random numbers are updated each time the loop processing (circulation processing) is repeated (S107).

  Here, as the random numbers updated in the random number updating process (S107), there are various initial value random numbers such as an initial value random number per symbol, a symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol. Can be. In updating various random numbers, a 2-byte soft random number update process can be used as a common control module. The random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the above-described software random number. Depending on the type of the random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the hardware random number Can generate a random value.

  If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111). If the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), an RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether data in the RWM (data in a predetermined range) is normal. This is performed (S113). If the data in the RWM is not normal in S113 (S113: YES), the process proceeds to RWM clear processing (S103).

In step S111, when the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111: NO), and when the data in the RWM is normal in S113 (S113: NO), the power is turned off from the RWM. The data of various information commands at the time is acquired (S116). Further, the acquired data of the various information commands is transmitted to the sub main board 301 side (S117), and the return setting of the solenoid is performed (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (processing of storing the information of normal power-on in the RWM). Move to.
<Initial setting process>

  Next, the above-described initialization processing (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting processing, setting processing of each port register is executed (S121), and it is determined whether or not a setting key insertion operation has been performed (S122). When the setting key is inserted (S22: YES), a setting value change process (S126) is performed. The setting value change process (S126) will be described later.

If the setting key is not inserted in S122 (S122: NO), the setting value information is read (S123), and it is determined whether the setting value is abnormal (S124). . If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is terminated, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), notification of the set value abnormality is performed (S128). Then, the set value abnormality information is transmitted to the side of the sub main board 301 (S129), and thereafter, a loop state is set.
<Setting value change processing>

  Next, the above-described setting value change processing (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. In this set value change process, the RWM in the set value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether the set value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been input (S133). If the RWM clear switch has been input (S133: YES), the set value is determined. The set value corresponding to the information is displayed (S134).

  If the setting value information is abnormal in S132 (S132: YES), the setting value is forcibly set, and a default value (here, “1”) is set in the setting value information (S141). Then, after the setting value compulsory setting information is transmitted to the sub main board 301 (S142), the setting values are displayed (S133).

  After S134, it is determined whether or not a setting value change operation has been performed (S135). If a change operation has been performed (S135: YES), the set value information at that time is incremented by 1 (S136). Further, it is determined whether or not the set value information has reached the set upper limit (here, “6”) (S137). If the set value information has reached the upper limit (S137: YES), the set value information at that time is set to “ 1 "(S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been removed) (S139). If the setting has been changed (S139: YES), the display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140). ), And the set value change processing ends.

  If there is no change setting in S135 (S135: NO), the process of setting the set lower limit (here, "1") from the process of adding the set value information (S136) is not performed (S138). Then, the process proceeds to a determination process (S139) to determine whether the setting change is completed. If the set value information does not reach the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), whether or not the setting change is completed without performing the set lower limit value setting process in S137 (S138). Shifts to the determination processing (S139). Further, if the setting change has not been completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the setting value display processing in S134.

  If the RWM clear switch has not been input in S133 (S133: NO), a set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed as in S134 (S146). Further, similarly to the above S139, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is removed) (S147). If the setting change is completed (S147: YES), the process proceeds to the above S139. The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140), and the set value change processing ends. If the setting change has not been completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to the setting value display processing in S136.

That is, if the RWM clear switch is input in S133 (S133: YES), the set value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the set value (S135 to S138 and the like) is performed. It becomes possible. However, if there is no input of the RWM clear switch in S133 (S133: NO), the set value is displayed (S146), but the processing for changing the set value as in S135 to S138 is performed. Is not possible, and the set value is displayed (this state may be referred to as a setting display mode).
<Game progress interruption processing>

  Next, a game progress interruption process (FIG. 17) repeated every time a timer interruption occurs in a predetermined period will be described. This game progress interruption processing (also referred to as “timer interruption processing” or the like) is omitted in the above description, but at a predetermined cycle (here, a 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in the power-on processing (FIG. 14). Repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interruption processing, setting of interruption operation conditions (S41, S42), recursion of interruption processing time monitoring means (S43), management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), permission of interruption (S45). S71) is performed in order, and the process returns to the process before the occurrence of the game progress interruption.

  Specifically, in the process of setting the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition set value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. The value is set in a control register corresponding to a predetermined input terminal (S42). Thereafter, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). The second recursive information, together with the first recursive information set earlier, serves as a condition for recursively restarting the monitoring clock of the interrupt processing time monitoring means, as described later.

  In the management of the gaming machine (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order to manage the gaming machine. First, an input process (S45) is executed to monitor the input of a specific signal. Monitored here are various switches mounted on the game board, saucer full switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass non-detection signal, and disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal It is.

  Subsequently, various random number updating processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, an initial value updating type random number updating process (S47) is executed to update the random number per symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number updating process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. In order to update the 2-byte timer, a timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set an effective period of the second starting winning opening 63, an effective period setting process (S50) of the second starting opening is executed. .

  Further, a winning monitoring process (S51) is executed to store the number of payouts of the prize balls, create an output request for the board external information, and send a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 104. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

  Next, when the game ball passes the normal symbol operation gate (operation port 68), a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S53) is executed to store a random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol is displayed. In order to perform the process related to the electric accessory, a normal symbol control process (S54) is executed. Further, in order to monitor the start of the change of the normal symbol, a normal symbol change start monitoring process (S55) is executed. In addition, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, a starting opening monitor control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display section 70 or the second special symbol is displayed. In order to perform the process related to the display unit 71, a special symbol control process (S57) is executed. Subsequently, a special electric auditors control process (S58) is executed to perform a process related to the special electric auditorium, and a special winning opening valid period setting process (S59) is performed to perform a process related to the effective period of the special winning opening. In order to monitor the start of change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) is executed.

  Next, abnormality detection processing (S61) is performed to monitor magnetism, monitor disconnection / short circuit / power supply, monitor radio waves, monitor the open / closed state of the glass frame set / game board frame, and monitor the paired glass. Then, in order to detect an incoming ball passage time abnormality, an incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Further, in order to make a display request for the number of times the special electric auditorium is continuously operated, the error state, the number of operation-reserved balls of the ordinary symbol display device, and the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol display device, a game state display process (S63). ) To monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the firing handle 20 to execute a handle state signal inspection process (S64). In addition, the display of special symbols, the display of ordinary symbols, the display of the number of active balls on the special symbol display device (70, 71), the display of the number of active balls on the ordinary symbol display device, the display of the game state, the special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times of the continuous operation and to display an error.

  Subsequently, a firing control signal output process (S66) is executed to output a signal of prohibition / permission of launching of the game ball, and a test signal output process (S67) to create and output a signal to be output to the test apparatus. Execute Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the special winning opening (open) solenoid, a solenoid output process (S68) is executed, and in order to transmit the effect control command, an effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and an external information output process (S70) is executed to output a signal to an external terminal (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

Thereafter, the interruption permission (S71) is executed, and the control processing returns to the return (RET). Then, utilizing the remaining time until the next game interruption is executed, the above-described circulation processing (repetition processing including the random number update processing in S7) of the power-on processing (FIG. 14) is executed. .
<< Handle state signal inspection processing >>

In the above-described steering wheel state signal inspection processing (S64), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20. If the inspection result indicates that the steering wheel state has changed, the steering wheel state monitoring timer , Update of the steering wheel status, setting of the steering wheel status monitoring timer, and requesting a command transmission of the steering wheel status effect. As a result of the inspection, when it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel state, a steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If it is determined that the steering wheel timer is being subtracted during the subtraction of the steering wheel status monitoring timer, the subsequent processing related to the steering wheel status is not performed.
<Lottery determination process>

  Next, the above-described lottery determination processing (also referred to as “lottery determination processing”) will be described. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not a win has been made using the probability data (a process of performing a jackpot lottery determination). The lottery determination process can be performed in, for example, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) in the above-described game progress interruption process (FIG. 17).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a lottery determination process related to success or failure. In the lottery determination processing, first, when the processing proceeds to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 to a predetermined register (for example, a C register) as the winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. In step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the number of repetitions data, and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big hit and "2" indicates a small hit.

  In step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 designates a game state (probability variation state or normal probability state) and an address of probability data according to the set value, and acquires probability data corresponding to the designated address from the lottery table. And store it in the register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

  When proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 501 makes a hit / fail determination. Here, first, the main CPU 501 stores the random number value obtained for winning / non-principle determination at the time of winning in the starting opening in a comparison register for lottery (for example, a DE register), and then obtains the random number value in step S1025. The value stored in the calculated probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain a new value of the comparison register. Thus, the value of the comparison register is updated.

  In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the winning has been achieved. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than “0” (when a borrow occurs), “1” is set in the carry flag of the flag register. Set. That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1". Then, in step S1027, main CPU 501 determines whether or not a win is made by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to “1”.

  Here, when the carry flag is not set to “1”, the main CPU 501 determines that no win has been made (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 501 determines that the winning has been achieved (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set when “Yes” in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination (for example, the winning number 1 is a big hit, the winning number 2 is a small hit). It will be.

  In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds “1” to the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) to obtain a new value of the winning number data (for example, the C register). That is, the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.

  In step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repetition count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts “1” from the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) to obtain a new repetition count data (for example, the B register). That is, the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1030.

  In step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether the number of repetitions has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is “0”. Here, when the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is “0”, it indicates that the repetition count has been completed, and the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is not “0” (“0”). Greater) indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. Then, in step S1030, main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the repetition count has ended.

  Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, if the value of the B register is not “0”, the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

  If “No” in the step S1030, the probability determination of the step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) to “00 (H)” which is the non-winning data, and ends the processing in this flowchart.

  With the above configuration, as described in step S1028, the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, so that it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table. In addition, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, the same probability data does not have to be repeatedly set in the lottery table, so that the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In this example, the winning numbers corresponding to the small hit and the big hit are provided one by one, and at the time of the hit, the type of the big hit or the small hit is determined by the symbol random number separately acquired, but these types are determined by this processing. Is also possible. In this case, if the value of the repetition count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types, and the probability data for each winning number (a range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine is used. It is also possible.
<Power off processing>

  Next, a power-off process performed when a power-off occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power-off processing, the data of all the registers used are saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enabled / disabled state before the power-off is stored (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83). If the information is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84). Move to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is stored (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is stored in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information of normal power-off is stored in the RWM (S86), and the checksum of the RWM is calculated. Then, the checksum data is stored (S87). Then, the RWM is prohibited from being accessed (S88), and the CPU 501 waits for a reset of the CPU 501 while looping the control process.

Further, in the power-off processing, even if the setting of both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above has not been completed, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive unit, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are set. The information is set, the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the time is recursed. Further, in the present embodiment, the forcible setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and at a timing before the process of saving all the used registers (S81). Have been done. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state where the monitoring time has recurred. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring time when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring time recurring in the control processing immediately after restarting the power supply. Has become.
<Other individual control processing modes>
<< Control Mode Regarding Command Transmission Timing >>

In the present embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 is temporarily stored in a command buffer in response to a command request before transmission. The command buffer is obtained by causing a plurality of buffers to function as a ring buffer. In a control process for command transmission (here, effect control command transmission process (S69)), one command buffer is stored in the command buffer in the order of accumulation. In the game progress interrupt processing, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. Note that it is also possible to adopt a method in which commands set with higher priorities are transmitted first. In addition, in various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted occurs, the command can be transmitted as needed. When such a method is employed, during one game progress interruption process, the effect commands are transmitted collectively in one control processing module such as the effect control command transmission process (S69). Instead, each time command transmission is required, command transmission is performed sequentially in each control processing module. For this reason, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the next and subsequent game progress interrupt processing. Then, for example, there is no delay in the command at the time of the start winning or the command transmission at the time of the start of the change of the special symbol, and the prompt command processing can be performed.
<< Control mode related to update of pending storage >>

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is adopted, and the execution order of the first and second plurality of games is provided with regularity. Is sequentially performed for each second game or first game. Therefore, if only the information stored and held is updated for each second game or first game, the update of the information stored and held is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of giving priority to the first game or not giving priority to any game, the starting storage is completed and the storing is completed in the order of storing the storing (winning order). Such a configuration can be adopted. In the case where a configuration in which the hold storage is exhausted in the order of occurrence of the start winning prize is adopted, the update of the hold storage information according to the exhaustion, the update of the total suspension number of a plurality of games, and the storing of the winning order are performed. This makes it possible to update the information stored and stored as a whole.

In this embodiment, the request for the symbol storage number command (the symbol 1 storage number command or the symbol 2 storage number command) is made as described above in order to inform the sub main board 301 that the hold storage has been updated. By including both the symbol 1 storage number command and the symbol 2 storage number command in one command, the necessary program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control Mode for Variation Pattern Lottery >>

  Subsequently, various modes related to the lottery of the variation pattern will be described. The mode of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied to one pachinko gaming machine 10, or may be used in combination as appropriate. When a plurality of aspects are used in combination, for example, it is possible to selectively use the aspects based on factors such as a pass / fail result.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the determination of the variation pattern is made based on the success / failure result, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (special symbol status information). The variation pattern table which is used as an element and corresponds to a combination of these determining elements is selected. Then, along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time paired with the variation pattern using the variation pattern random number is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the win / loss lottery is a big hit or not. That is, in the case of a big hit, based on the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number, a variation pattern table is selected from those linked to these. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern table is selected from those linked to these based on the game state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the random number. Among these, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern in which the re-lottery time in the production is given is based on the production state (presence of a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group, and the re-lottery time is given. The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301.

  Further, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine additional variation information according to the determined variation pattern number, and to determine a subsequent variation time based on the variation additional information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern effect, it is conceivable to determine the extension of the variation time according to the fact after the fact.

  In addition, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol as described above, the variation determined in advance on the sub-main board 301 in relation to elements such as the game state and the hit symbol. An effect of adding the additional time later to the time can be performed. In this manner, in the case of determining the fluctuation time of the comprehensive effect symbol in such a manner, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as described below. It is. That is, in the case of performing the pseudo continuous notice (so-called “pseudo ream”) described above, if the fluctuating patterns of the pseudo reams are simply set individually, the same number of fluctuating patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. Need to be kept. When the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub-main substrate 301 are prepared for the variable patterns individually determined on the main substrate 102, the total number of the fluctuation patterns on the main substrate 102 is large. As a result, for example, the number may reach about 256. For this reason, in order to provide an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and bytes for representing the code as compared with the related art.

  However, by using the variation additional information (variation additional pattern), it is possible to form a variation pattern afterwards by connecting, for example, random variation lottery variation additional information to a relatively small number of basic variation patterns. It is. Then, a new variation pattern can be formed by a combination of the variation patterns, so that various variation patterns can be created without increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. Note that the random number value related to the variation addition information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 as a command for a pre-reading effect when a start winning prize occurs. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the addition of the variation additional information is easily performed when the limited frequency pattern effect is performed. In addition, if an example using the variable additional information is further cited, if “777”, which is a probable variable symbol, is displayed from the beginning as a combination of the effect symbols 190, the variable additional information is not set, and the combination of the effect symbols 190 is used. Once the non-probable variable symbol “666” is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to be promoted to “777” is displayed (for example, the effect of the swing fluctuation and the development of the fluctuation mode). And the like), and setting the additional variation information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern is determined using the number of reserved balls as an element, and the referenced variation pattern table differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why the variation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four holds 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from the situation where the number of reserved balls is four, and the number of reserved balls becomes three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at a stage where the control process during the game progress interruption process being executed at that time has not yet determined the fluctuation pattern which is a process during the subsequent game progress interrupt process. When a new starting prize is generated, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the variation pattern is determined. Therefore, a variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be used as an element for determining the variation pattern.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 3. In this case, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting prize is not added from the state of the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the variation pattern in the control processing. Note that any of the aspects can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a type in which a maximum number of holdings other than four (for example, eight) is set.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variation pattern random number can be at the time of the variation pattern lottery. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of a special electric accessory or the like, as an element for performing an appropriate game, for example, when aiming for a fair game, for example, compared to the random number of the success / failure The need to set constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the random number of the fluctuation pattern is not intentionally acquired at the time of the start winning, and the random number of the fluctuation pattern is acquired and stored at the time of the random pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of information to be stored at the time of the start winning, and to reduce the capacity of the program and the memory.
<< Control mode related to designation of symbol >>

In the lottery of the symbol, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the symbol indicating the symbol random number, and then, based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number, the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table. Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical range of the symbol random number is set to “0 to 999”, the binary code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of time savings is distributed to the winning symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the number of rounds, the number of time savings, and the opening time of the special winning opening are determined according to the winning symbol. Or an open pattern may be determined. By doing so, there is no need to store and control data unique to the game state, and the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. Further, a command (for example, in the present embodiment, each command of a symbol 1 effect pattern and a symbol 2 effect pattern) for transmitting a symbol or the like from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 is information for transmitting a game state (game state designation information). ) Can also be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after it is created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship between special symbols and effect symbols' changing times >>

  As described above, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the effect symbol 190 corresponding thereto are controlled so as to start and stop changing in synchronization with each other. In some cases, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol 190 can be somewhat shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol).

  That is, when the change of the special symbol or the change pattern is determined and the change of the special symbol is started, the change start command (command at the start of the change) of the effect symbol is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. However, the time required for transmission and reception of a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation) and the time set in a command buffer (a ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) and waiting. It is conceivable that the influence of the time until all the commands (first-in first-out commands) are transmitted, etc., will delay the start of the variation of the effect symbol from the start of the variation of the special symbol. Further, at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol, a change stop command (a command at the time of determining the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301. ) May be delayed due to the time required for transmission and reception, and the degree of congestion in the command buffer (about the number of commands waiting for transmission).

In this way, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is set to a certain extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and the special symbol starts the next fluctuation by performing the swing fluctuation. The situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed later is avoided. The display during the swing fluctuation may extend to the next fluctuation due to the processing delay due to the number of commands, but since the number of commands transmitted to the sub-main board 301 is smaller at the end of the fluctuation than at the start of the fluctuation, the delay amount Is suppressed, and the effect symbol can be fixed almost certainly during the special symbol display fixing time.
<< Pre-judgment of winning / losing result >>

  First, in the present embodiment, as described above (FIGS. 9A and 12), the random number value range in the first lottery and the second random number is “0 to 65535”. As shown in FIG. 13A, “0 to 65535” is divided into a plurality of random number value ranges (here, A to N).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13A, of the pass / fail random value range, “0 to 205” belongs to the classification of the look-ahead code A, and “206” belongs to the classification of the look-ahead code B among “0 to 65535”. Belongs to Furthermore, the pass / fail random numbers “207” to “210” belong to the classification of the prefetch codes C to F, respectively. In addition, the pass / fail random numbers “211 to 615” belong to the classification of the prefetch code G, and the pass / fail random numbers “616 to 618” belong to the classification of the prefetch code H.

  Subsequently, the random number values “619 to 621”, “622 to 624”, “625 to 627”, and “628 to 630” belong to the prefetch codes H to L, respectively. In addition, the pass / fail random value “64874-65534” belongs to the classification of the prefetch code M. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the random number values “631 to 64873” and “65534” belong to the classification of the look-ahead code M.

  FIG. 13B shows the contents of each prefetch code. As shown in the figure, the look-ahead code A means a hit (big hit) in all settings regardless of the set value. Subsequently, when the set value is “2” or more, the look-ahead code B means that a hit is made regardless of whether it is normal or probable. That is, the look-ahead code B indicates a hit at a normal probability or a high probability at a set value of “2” or more, but indicates a loss at a set value of “1”. Further, if the set value is “3” or more to “6”, the look-ahead codes C to F mean that the hit is made in both the normal state and the high probability state regardless of the probability state.

  Subsequently, the look-ahead code G means that any change in the set value is a hit if the probability is being changed. That is, the look-ahead code G indicates a hit if the probability is high, but indicates a loss if the probability is normal. Further, the look-ahead code H means that if the probability is being changed, the winning is achieved with the set value “2” or more. Further, the pre-reading codes I to L mean that the set value “3” or more to “6” is a hit if the probability is being changed. Further, the look-ahead code M means a small hit, and the look-ahead code N means a miss (out) regardless of the set value or the probability state.

  Using the prefetch codes classified in this way, the prefetch code to which the obtained random number value belongs is determined on, for example, the main board 102, and information (command) corresponding to the determined prefetch code is used as the above-described advance notification information. It is possible to transmit to the sub main board 301. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit notice effect as a pre-reading effect without waiting for the suspension to be exhausted, in relation to the result of determination as to whether or not it is correct.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the preliminary determination of the type of the special symbol and the preliminary determination of the type of the variation pattern related to the special symbol also include the determination based on the random number value range as in the case of the result of the above-mentioned winning / rejecting lottery. Is being done. The types of special symbols and the types of fluctuation patterns related to the special symbols are provided in a larger number than the types of the results of the winning / rejecting lottery. Has become. However, as a method of the preliminary determination based on the random value range, although the random value range and the type of the lottery result to be grouped are different, it can be performed in the same manner as the above-described preliminary determination regarding the pass / fail determination. . Therefore, a detailed description of the preliminary determination based on the random value range for the symbol advance effect and the pattern advance effect is omitted here.

  By performing the preliminary determination based on such a random value range, information can be rounded, and a command relating to the preliminary determination can be created with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random numbers exceeds 1 byte. For this reason, if the information of the random number value is transmitted as it is (as raw information) to the sub-main board 301 for pre-determination, information for identifying which random number was transmitted is transmitted by MODE, and the random number is transmitted. In some cases, a command (MODE, EVENT) having a 2-byte configuration for storing and transmitting in EVENT must be transmitted twice in order to notify a random number value.

  However, as in the present embodiment, by converting the information into the information indicating the range to which the obtained random number belongs and transmitting the information to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced below the number of random numbers. Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), the attribute of the obtained random number value can be converted into a command with the information amount of 1 byte. In addition, in the case where a situation in which it is not desired to transmit the pre-read information occurs as described later, a code indicating the fact (for example, indeterminate or undetermined) is provided on the main board 102 side. It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the code to the sub main board 301 side.

  Here, the “situation where it is not desired to transmit the prefetch information” is, for example, a case where the priority digest type 1 + 1-type gaming machine has a hold on the preferential digest side (eg, the special figure 2 side) during the normal game. Can be exemplified. The “priority digestion type” in the above description, for example, prioritizes one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) over the other (here, the first game) as described above. It means something like Further, the “1 + 1 type gaming machine” in the above description means a gaming machine having a game property in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed as described above. I have.

As another “situation in which it is not desired to transmit the prefetch information”, the non-priority digestion side (for example, the special figure 1 side) during the specific game (during high base) in the preferential digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine is also considered. This can be the case. In addition, when a priority digestion side (for example, the special figure 2 side) is suspended during the normal game in the preferential digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine as described above, the look-ahead effect related to the reservation on the special figure 1 side is executed. If it is in the middle, the look-ahead effect may be stopped (for example, the one in which the reserved image of Toku-zu 1 has been changed to red is returned to blue). If a non-priority digestion side (eg, Tokuzu 1 side) is suspended during a specific game (during high base) in, even if a prefetch effect related to suspension on Tokuzu 2 side is being executed, the prefetch The effect may not be stopped (for example, the one in which the reserved image of Toku-zu 2 has been changed to red may be maintained as it is). Note that, even for a touch effect described later, even if a change in the effect related to the pre-reading effect is scheduled, it is set so that the touch effect is not executed when the pre-reading effect is stopped. Become.
<Various measures for touch detection>

  Next, a description will be given of a utilization method of touch detection relating to an operation on the firing handle 20 which can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. Here, “touch detection” largely means detecting contact with a human hand by the touch switch 310 (FIG. 4) described above. This “touch detection” is one mode related to the operation detection of the firing handle (20).

  In the present invention, as will be described later, various control elements (control content determining elements) are examined for the relationship between touch detection and effect output, and an appropriate control element is adopted from the examined elements to make the pachinko gaming machine 10 It is assumed to be applied to Then, by appropriately applying such various control elements to the pachinko gaming machine 10, the effect is executed based on the detection of the state of the gaming machine and the operation of the steering wheel, so that the operation detection of the firing handle can be effectively utilized. Is assumed.

  More specifically, in the present invention, the state of the pachinko gaming machine is changed from a power-on state to a game state through a standby state before and after the power is turned on. The game machine receives a large hit through the variable display of the design symbol (including a reduced design) and a stop display (a design game relating to the design symbol), and until the big hit game ends. This is considered as a series of such states. Furthermore, in various states, the presence or absence of touch detection related to the firing handle 20 is assumed, and each state or situation is further subdivided to examine the presence or absence of effect output and the contents thereof.

  Then, depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming state is the gaming state, whether or not an effect is output triggered by touch detection and / or the effect output when triggered by the touch detection differs. It is configured to obtain. Then, as described later, whether or not an effect is output triggered by touch detection, and / or an effect execution condition is determined such that the effect output upon touch detection may be different. The effect operation unit (the operation button 22 that can be operated by the player, the operation lever And whether or not a player operation input means such as the cross key 96 has been operated.

  Each of the various considerations applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 is considered as each embodiment. In the following discussion, the effect performed based on the touch detection (triggered by the touch detection) is referred to as “touch effect”. However, the term “touch effect” is used for control in relation to touch detection. This is a concept that includes those that make it easy for a person who has seen the production to understand the touch production, and those that are difficult to understand. Further, the “touch effect” may be performed as an effect (a fire detection effect) executed in a situation where a change in the firing intensity volume is detected in addition to the touch detection.

  Further, as for the control elements and assumptions considered here, those that can coexist in the control of the pachinko gaming machine 10 can coexist, and those that cannot coexist can be appropriately selected and adopted. In this way, the effect output and the control processing related thereto are examined starting from the combination of various states of the gaming machine and the presence / absence of touch detection, and are appropriately selected and adopted for the pachinko gaming machine, thereby enabling the touch detection. The effect output can be performed by utilizing the steering wheel operation including the maximum possible variety, and the steering wheel operation can be more effectively utilized.

In examining a utilization method of touch detection in this way, as shown in FIG. 22, an element for determining the relationship between touch detection and effect output at the design stage can be considered. At the left end (front side) of the charts in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, “structure”, “game state of gaming machine”, and “touch detection” are classified as control element classifications (review item classifications) related to the relationship between touch detection and effect output. , An effect performed based on touch detection, an effect permission / restriction condition, and “other 1”. Here, the “gaming state of the gaming machine” can be referred to as, for example, a “gaming state that can occur in the gaming machine”, a “state that can occur in the gaming machine”, and the like.
<Structure>

  Among these, the classification item of “structure” shown at the top of FIG. 22 is a classification based on the equipment configuration for touch detection and the equipment configuration that can be associated with touch detection for control. Then, as the classification of “structure”, it is possible to appropriately select what is necessary for a conceivable application and to subdivide it, but here, as shown in the figure, “touch detection” and “staging button” ". In FIGS. 22 and 23, each item is provided with an alphabet or a symbol formed by a combination of an alphabet and a number. In the example of FIG. 22, “A” is attached to the “structure” at the top of the table, and “A1” and “A2” The symbol is attached.

Of these, “touch detection” of the symbol “A1” means a configuration required to detect contact of a human hand such as a player. The item of “A1: touch detection” may include the configuration of the touch switch 310 and the like described above. In addition, the item of “A2: effect button” may include the configuration of the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 described above.
<Game state of gaming machine>

Next, as the items of the “game state of the gaming machine” at the next stage, there are roughly “B: normal state” and “C: special state”. Here, these “B: normal state” and “C: special state” are both “B: the state before touch change”, which means the state before touch detection is performed. "Normal state" and "C: special state".
<< B: Normal state (state before touch change) >>

  Further, “B: normal state” can be divided into “B1: game standby state” and “B2: game in progress state”. Among these, “B1: game standby state” means a state where a special symbol, which is a main game of the pachinko machine in the present embodiment, is fluctuated, and a game such as a special game performed according to the result is not performed. are doing. In other words, even if the opening operation of the electric chew based on the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol or the winning of the ordinary symbol is performed, it is defined as the “game standby state” for convenience. The “B1: game waiting state” includes a state in which a customer waiting demonstration display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed without touch detection. It can be called a "standby demonstration." Further, as the “customer waiting demonstration”, it is conceivable to provide a basic “normal demonstration” and a special “non-normal demonstration” as compared to the “normal demonstration”.

  As shown in the figure, "B1: game standby state" includes "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)", "B12: game standby B (symbol is stopped)", and "B13: game standby C". (Setting screen for effects / voices, etc.) ”and“ B14: game standby (during power saving) ”. Of these, “B11: game standby A (normal demo display)” means a basic standby state in the game standby state, and is a state in which the “normal demo” display is performed.

  In addition, it is also possible to handle the game standby state in which the normal symbol change is executed separately from other game standby states, in which case, in this case, “B11: game standby A (normal demo display ))-"B14: Game standby (during power saving)" is further subdivided into standby states (for example, B111: Normal standby and non-operating in game standby A state, B112: Normal pattern fluctuates in game standby A state) , B113: In the game standby A state, the power chute is operating ...).

  FIG. 33 (a) shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)". In FIG. 33 (a), the name of the game machine manufacturer / seller (SAMMY) is displayed in most areas of the screen, and the message flow is displayed (scroll display) in the lower message display area 364 appearing at the bottom of the screen. Has been done. Examples of the message display include a content such as "The display changes to a customization screen when the effect button is turned on when the handle is touched. Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” may be referred to as “standby screen A”. This “standby screen A” is displayed when the data in the RWM is not normal in S113 (S113: YES) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on in FIG. 14) and the process shifts to the RWM clearing process (S103). Is also displayed. It should be noted that, as the game standby screen at this time, instead of the character display of “energized” in FIG. 35 (a), a character display such as “initialized” may be written together. A dedicated standby screen corresponding to the above may be provided.

  When touch detection is performed in the situation as in the example of FIG. 33A, for example, a touch effect as shown in FIG. 34A is performed, and a change in the effect (touch change) based on the touch detection is performed. It is possible to cause it. In the example of FIG. 34A, no change appears in the image display on the effect display device 60, but as shown with a speaker mark 376 or a lamp mark 377 on the right side of the drawing, audio output or light Output is being done.

  Here, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 shown in the figure do not indicate that these marks 376 and 377 are displayed on the effect display device 60, and are different from the image display performed by the effect display device 60. Separately, this is for schematically showing that sound output from the speaker (21) and light output (lamp output) by a predetermined LED are performed. The speaker mark 376 shown in the upper part of the figure indicates that there is audio output by a design image of a note coming out of the speaker, and the lamp mark 377 shown in the middle part of the figure indicates that the light bulb is lit. The light output is performed according to the design image of the appearance.

  Further, a lamp mark 377 shown in parentheses in the lower part of the figure indicates a display mode when no lamp output is performed. This lower lamp mark 377 (with parentheses) can be used instead of the middle lamp mark 377 (without parentheses) when light output (lamp effect) is not performed as a touch effect. It should be noted that, as for the speaker mark 366, a mark when no output is made may be used. As the speaker mark when there is no sound output, for example, it is possible to use a design image of a speaker to which no note is added.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the fact that the reach effect is being performed can be indicated in the figure by a lamp mark 378. In this case, the characters “reach effect” and “touch notification LED” are shown in the figure, one lamp mark 378 indicates the presence or absence of the reach effect, and the other lamp mark 377 indicates the presence or absence of the touch effect. Can be shown so that they can be distinguished.

  In addition, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 described here can be used to describe the effect combination according to the presence or absence of the audio output and the light output even in various game states described below. Things. In the following description, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 are added to all the screen display examples and the presence or absence of the sound output or the light output is not described. The speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 are added to indicate the effect combination (effect combination).

  Subsequently, in the above-mentioned "B12: Game standby B (symbol stopped)", the display related to the special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) or the effect is in a stopped state (in this case, a fixed stop state), and the next fluctuation is performed. Is not performed (there is no hold in either of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, from the display of the standby screen A, a predetermined (E.g., after a lapse of time). Then, when "B12: Game standby B (symbol is stopped)" elapses for a predetermined period, it is possible to perform control such as shifting to the above-mentioned "B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)". .

  FIG. 33 (b) shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B12: Game standby B (during symbol stop)". In the example of FIG. 33 (b), numeral symbols of “3”, “3”, and “1” are displayed as the above-described symbol element effect symbols, and a heart symbol is each of the above-mentioned non-symbol element effect symbols. The effect symbols 190a to 190c are configured in combination with. Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of “B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)” may be referred to as “standby screen B”.

  In this “standby screen B”, a pattern (here, a heart) is displayed with respect to the decorative symbol (effect symbol), but a number (here, 1 or 3) may not be displayed. Also, a number may be displayed when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied (= starting port winning from the standby screen B).

  Further, in the lower right of the display area 194, the display corresponding to the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c is reduced so as to be inconspicuous and simplified, and can be performed together with the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c. A reduced effect symbol display area 361 has appeared. Further, in the first reserved number display section 196 and the second reserved number display section 197, reserved display of a star design is performed. Then, when a touch is detected in the situation as in the example of FIG. 33B, for example, the touch effect area 362 in which the character display of “Welcome” shown in FIG. It is possible. Then, it is possible to give a change to the effect output, triggered by the touch detection.

  In the above-described effect symbols 190a to 190c (decorative symbols), the reduced effect symbol display area 361, and the number-of-reservations display section (196, 197), display priorities are provided. Here, the display priority is, in descending order, the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the number-of-reservations display section (196, 197), and effect symbols 190a to 190c. However, the priority of the display may be changed according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. For example, in the case of a change (during a game), the display priority is higher in the order of the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the number-of-reservations display section (196, 197), and the effect symbols 190a to 190c, but in the order of changing standby. In some cases, the display priority may be higher in the order of the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols 190a to 190c, and the number-of-reservations display section (196, 197). In addition, when performing a touch effect such that the touch effect region 362 appears during the symbol change, at least one of the display effects of the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the reduced effect symbol display region 361 is higher than the touch effect. Is also set to be high.

  Further, in the standby screen B, of the first hold number display section 196 and the second hold number display section 197, only the first hold number display section 196 may be displayed without displaying the second hold number display section 197. It is possible. In this case, it is also possible to move the first hold number display section 196 to, for example, the left and right center portions at the lower part of the screen. However, in such a case, the standby screen B can be shifted only in the normal probability (low probability) state, and in a specific game state such as a probable change or an electric support, a start winning is detected for a predetermined time. It is desirable that they do not shift even if they do not.

  It should be noted that the standby screen B, which is the “variable standby screen”, is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 33B, and various modes can be adopted. Also, various types of touch effects can be adopted. For example, it is possible to display something like the lower message display area 364 exemplified in the standby screen A of FIG.

  Further, as another example related to the touch effect of the standby screen B, for example, an effect (RTC-related effect) performed based on real time using an RTC (real-time clock) can be exemplified. Examples of the effects related to the RTC include, for example, an effect performed by deciding a date and a season, an effect performed by deciding a time zone of a day, and an effect performed simultaneously by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines. can do. Further, an effect or the like in which the time zone at that time is in a specific effect mode by scrolling a text message may be exemplified. In addition, it is also possible to output a predetermined BGM as an effect related to the standby RTC.

  Further, as another example of the touch effect of the standby screen B, one using the movable effect member described above can be mentioned. Specifically, it is assumed that the movable effect member is displaced from the initial position and reaches the post-drive position during the game standby in which the standby screen B is displayed. Further, in the movable effecting member, the overlapping portion with the display area (194) of the effect display device (60) is relatively small at the initial position, and the overlapping portion with the display region (194) is relatively large at the post-drive position. It shall be. Then, the movable effect member may be in the position after driving, and a change in touch detection may be detected to return the accessory to the initial position. In addition, even if the symbol change starts during the return to the initial position at that time, the return operation of the accessory may be configured not to be interrupted.

  The above-mentioned “B13: Game standby C (setting screen for effects / voices)” refers to, for example, a standby state in which the player is performing settings (environment settings) of the effect mode, volume, light amount, etc. before the game starts. Means. At this time, an environment setting menu (customization menu) is displayed, and it is possible to shift to a selected type of environment setting screen (environment setting display).

  FIG. 33 (c) shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B13: Game standby C (setting screen for effect / voice etc.)". In the example of FIG. 33 (c), a display indicating that the environment setting has been enabled and the customization mode has been entered (here, the display in the upper left corner area) is displayed. Further, from the top, menus for turning on / off the power saving mode, turning on / off the RTC (real-time clock) effect, adjusting the volume, adjusting the light amount, adjusting the effect frequency, and ending the customization mode are arranged in this order.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 33C, the volume adjustment is performed by using a volume adjustment meter configured by a plurality of (here, nine) rectangular marks arranged between the characters “small” and “large”. The player can do this while watching. The volume is represented by the number of rectangular marks in the volume adjustment meter that are highlighted.

  In the example of FIG. 33C, light amount adjustment (or luminance adjustment) is performed by a plurality of (here, five) rectangular marks arranged between “low” and “high” characters. The configured light amount adjustment meter can be viewed by a player. Furthermore, the effect frequency adjustment can be performed while the player is watching the effect frequency adjustment meter constituted by a plurality (here, nine) of rectangular marks arranged between the characters “low” and “high”. It has become. The light amount and the effect frequency are represented by the number of the rectangular marks in each adjustment meter that are displayed in reverse.

  Further, an operation guide display area 363 appears, which indicates that the cursor can be moved by the above-described cross key (96) and the determination operation can be performed by the operation button (22). In addition, in the lower message display area 364, a flow of a message "Move the cursor to" end customization mode to end "(please)" is displayed.

  Here, the transition to the state in which the environment can be set is to be made, for example, when an effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is operated in the state of the standby screen A shown in FIG. Can be. In the following, the screen display in the state of “B13: game standby C (setting screen for effect / voice etc.)” is referred to as “display screen C”, “effect setting screen C”, “environment setting screen”, “customizing screen”, and the like. It may be called. In the present embodiment, the state in which the “display screen C” is displayed is one of a plurality of game standby states.

  As the touch effect in the state of the “display screen C”, for example, a change in the screen display does not appear, and a sound output such as “Try your best” is considered. In this way, by performing touch production using audio output, which is another production element, without changing the screen display, it is possible to minimize the influence of touch production on environment settings, and to enable touch production in environment settings. It is possible to prevent the obstacle from being hindered. As a result, the player can quickly and accurately set the environment while diversifying the touch effects. It is also conceivable to perform a combination of touch effects with a predetermined light output.

  Although it is possible to perform a touch effect by screen display, it is possible to prevent an unexpected impression from being given to the player in combination with the environment setting so as to prevent the player from giving an unexpected impression. It is considered that it is desirable to perform a touch effect by image display in a display mode such as inconspicuousness.

  The above-mentioned “B14: game standby (during power saving)” means a standby state while power saving processing is being executed. As a process for power saving, in the example of the “display screen C” in FIG. 33C, a state where transition to a case where the power saving mode is turned on can be performed is possible. In this “B14: Game standby (during power saving)”, for example, an effect output in a mode in which the character “power saving” is displayed in a flowing manner on a black background can be exemplified.

  As the touch effect in the state of “B14: game standby (power saving)”, for example, the state control during power saving is released, and the state of “B14: game standby (power saving)” is changed to another state (“standby screen”). B ”) and the like. Further, it is conceivable that the touch effect is further executed in the state after the transition (here, the state of “standby screen B”).

  The aforementioned “B2: gaming state” may include items of “B21: symbol fluctuation state” and “B22: hitting state”. Of these, “B21: symbol change state” can be a state in which a display related to a special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) or an effect is changing. As an example of an effect output related to this “B21: symbol change state”, all effect symbols 190a to 190b are changing as shown in FIG. 8A, and FIGS. 37A and 37B show. As described above, there can be cited one in which some of the effect symbols (190a, 190c) are in a stopped (temporary stop) state and the other effect symbols 190b are in a changing state.

  Here, FIG. 37A shows a state in which normal reach has occurred, and FIG. 37B shows a state in which SP (super or special) reach has occurred. In the SP reach screen shown in FIG. 37B, the left and right effect symbols 190a and 190c move to the upper left and upper right portions of the screen and are reduced, and a predetermined character appears, and the reduced effect symbol display is performed. In the upper part of the area 361, a preview image with the sun mark 381 appears at the lower right part of the screen. The sun mark 381 in the example of FIG. 37B is displayed as a form in which the image object of the change information display 198 in FIG. 37A has moved and changed in form.

  As the touch effect in the normal reach shown in FIG. 37 (a), for example, the touch effects shown in order in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) can be exemplified. That is, before touch detection, as shown by a speaker mark 376 emitting a musical note and a lit lamp mark 378 in FIG. 40A, a reach effect by image display and output of a reach sound are performed.

  Then, when the touch is detected, as shown by the speaker mark 376 in FIG. 40B, in addition to the reach sound, a sound output (touch sound output) indicating that the touch is turned on is performed as the sound output. . As the touch sound, an audio output having a content such as "I can't expect it" indicating the reliability of the reach fluctuation during execution can be exemplified. Further, as shown in a state where the lamp mark 377 related to the touch notification LED is turned on, light output for touch effect is performed.

  Subsequently, as the touch effect during the SP reach shown in FIG. 37 (b), for example, the player releases his / her hand from the firing handle (20), and changes the state from the state with touch detection to the state without touch detection (touch detection “ When a state change from “present” to “absent” is detected, an example in which the character emits a predetermined line (line) can be exemplified. In the example of FIG. 37B, the balloon region 382 appears, and the character display of “Hot!” Is displayed. Further, this touch effect is performed as a highly reliable effect indicating that the degree of expectation relating to the development of the jackpot and the reach is relatively high, and it is easy to appear in the case of the jackpot.

  Also, during the SP reach, when the player once releases the hand from the firing handle 20 and then grasps the firing handle 20 again, a touch such as a character display of “Hot!” Shown in FIG. It is also possible to perform an effect. In this case, it can be said that a touch effect is executed when a state change from touch detection “absence” to “presence” is detected.

  Further, “B22: hitting state” can be set to a state during which a hit such as a big hit occurs and a game related to the hit is being executed. More specifically, “B22: Winning state” is, for example, after a jackpot start demonstration for notifying that a jackpot game is started is displayed, and after a game with a jackpot opening, Until the performance of the big hit end demonstration ends, it is possible to do so.

  Examples of the effect output relating to “B22: hitting state” include those shown in FIGS. 37 (c) to 39. For example, FIG. 38A shows an example of a screen display at the time of the big hit start demonstration. At the time of the big hit start demonstration, the character “BONUS” indicating the occurrence of the big hit and a predetermined character are displayed in the center of the screen, and the reduced effect symbol display area 361 has a symbol combination (here, “333”) related to the big hit that has occurred. )) Is displayed. Further, in the example of FIG. 38A, a reserved number display area 367 that indicates the reserved numbers of the special figures 1 and 2 is shown. Further, in the example of FIG. 38A, as described above, a right-handed guidance display area 383 is displayed as an effect to prompt the player to make a right-handed movement. ”Message is displayed.

  Here, with respect to the above-described reduced effect symbol display area 361, while the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c) are changing, the variable display with the reduced decorative symbol (symbols omitted) is also performed in the reduced effect symbol display area 361. However, even when the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c) are in the reach state, it is possible to prevent the reduced decorative symbols (mini symbols) in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 from being in the reach state. Further, in this case, the three reduced decorative symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 can all be changed to only one of the display modes of fluctuating or all stopped. It is.

  Furthermore, the reduced decorative symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 are also displayed during a big hit (here, a period from the big hit start demonstration to the big hit end demo) and during the normal demo display (in the standby screen A). Is possible. When displaying the reduced decorative symbol during the big hit, it is possible to display a reduced decorative symbol (for example, of the same combination) corresponding to the decorative symbol that triggered the big hit. Also, when displaying a reduced decorative symbol during the normal demo display, the reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (directed symbols 190a to 190c) that was stopped when shifting to the normal demo display is displayed. It is possible.

  FIG. 38B shows an example of a screen during a round displayed during the big hit game. In the example of FIG. 38B, as described above, a story development in which a predetermined character appears appears in the center of the screen, and in the lower part of the screen, in addition to the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the reserved number display area 367, , A round number display area 368 and a count number display area 369 are displayed.

  FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (a) to 39 (c) exemplify the hit special effect screens A to D, which are the hit special effect outputs, as described above. Among these, the special-hit-medium effect screen A shown in FIG. 38 (c) is an effect to be executed in the seventh round of the big hit game, and the entire image of the big hit generated from the seventh round to the eighth round The effect which suggests or notifies (whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit) is executed.

  In the hit special effect screen A, images of answer sheets in the test of two characters, "Aoi Kanazuki" and "Haruka Minazuki" are displayed. In addition, for one character, "Aoi Kanashiki", the character of "65" is displayed as the test score, but for the other character, "Haruka Minazuki", the test score is still displayed. It has not been done. As described above, the state where the score of “Haruka Minazuki” is not yet displayed is such that the entire image of the generated big hit (for example, whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit, etc.) is still informed to the player. Therefore, it is unknown to the player whether or not the player can play the game in a relatively advantageous state.

  Then, if a touch is detected during the round (7 rounds in this case), in the example of FIG. 39A, “100” is displayed as the score of the test of “Haruka Minazuki” in response to the touch detection. (Specific production screen B during hit). As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the state in which “100” is displayed as the score of the test of “Haruka Minazuki” is a state in which the player is expected to play a game in a relatively advantageous state. Has become. In other words, in the example of FIG. 39 (a), a touch effect (an effect in which a point notation of “100” appears) accompanying the touch detection is performed, so that an effect that stimulates expectations for a gaming state advantageous to the player is executed. Have been.

  If the value of the test of “Haruka Minazuki” does not show a value that exceeds the score of “Aoi Kanazuki” (here, “65”) for this performance, a resurrection performance will be performed after that. Unless otherwise, the player is notified that the game cannot be performed in a relatively advantageous state. If there is no change in the touch detection, the test score of “Haruka Minazuki” is not displayed in the round. Note that the score of “Haruka Minazuki” can be displayed when the player once releases his / her hand from the firing handle (20) and changes the state from “detected” to “absent” from touch detection. In addition, after the state of touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absence”, the shooting handle (20) is further gripped to return to the state of touch detection “presence”, and the score of “Haruka Minazuki” is expressed. It is also possible to make it.

  Subsequently, when the big hit game of the seventh round is completed, the special hitting effect screen C shown in FIG. 39 (b) is displayed, and an effect indicating that the game is shifted to the eighth round is executed. In the example of FIG. 39 (b), the number of rounds of the next big hit game is notified by the display of “Round 8” during the effect indicating the story development. As described above, these productions are "productions that stimulate the player's expectation of playing a game in a relatively advantageous state." As the game state to be shifted to after the end of the game, “advantageous state: probable state / unfavorable state: non-probability state” and “advantageous state: power support state / disadvantage state: non-power support state” are exemplified.

  In addition to the role of suggesting such an advantageous state, the role may also indicate the number of expected prize balls that can be obtained in the current jackpot game. In other words, a configuration that suggests that the big hit round is 10 rounds if the score notation is “100”, and that the big hit round is 8 rounds if the score notation is “65” or less.

  Further, it may be a role to indicate whether or not the on-hold in-house is performed (= whether or not there is a jackpot hold among the holds held during the jackpot). In other words, a configuration in which a point notation of “100” indicates that the reserved inn is performed, and a point notation of “65” or less indicates that the reserved inn is not performed. It is good.

  FIG. 39C shows an example of the effect display in the eighth round. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (c), the score of "Kinazuki Aoi" is "65" and the score of "Minazuki Haruka" is "100". This display mode indicates that the player can play a game in a relatively advantageous state. In the eighth round, unlike the effect in the seventh round, regardless of the presence or absence of a change in the touch detection, the entire image of the big hit (for example, whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit, etc.) is suggested. The display mode will be shown. In this way, by changing the touch detection in the seventh round, the overall image of the big hit (for example, whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit, etc.) is suggested beforehand as compared with the case where the touch detection is not changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a new gaming ability during a big hit, in which game information can be quickly known by a player's steering wheel operation (presence or absence of touch detection).

Then, when the big hit game of the number of rounds according to the type of the big hit is finished, the big hit end demonstration screen as shown in FIG. 37 (c) is displayed. Then, when shifting from the state of the big hit game to the state of the subsequent game, the display of the big hit end demonstration screen ends, and the display shifts to the effect display according to the subsequent game state.
<< C: Special state (state before touch change) >>

  The “C: special state” includes “C1: power-off state”, “C2: power-off recovery state”, “C3: setting change (probability change) state”, “C4: setting display (1 to 6) ) Medium state ”. Among these, “C1: power-off state” means a state in which the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (in this case, in particular, the main board 102) is reduced and a power-off occurs.

  Further, in the “C1: power interruption state”, items such as “C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)” and “C1B12: gaming state” can be provided. Among these, “C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)” can be considered as the same as “B1: game standby state” described above.

  Specifically, also for "C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)", "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" and "B12: game standby B (symbol stop) of" B1: game standby state " It is possible to classify items such as "medium)", "B13: game standby C (setting screen for effects / voices)", and "B14: game standby (during power saving)". Here, in order to prevent the diagram from becoming complicated, illustration of the subdivided items for “C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)” is omitted.

  The above-mentioned “C1B12: gaming state” can be considered to be the same as the above-mentioned “B2: gaming state”. Specifically, for "C1B12: gaming state", items such as "B21: symbol fluctuation state" and "B22: hitting state" of "B2: gaming state" can be classified. . Here, in order to prevent the diagram from becoming complicated, illustration of the subdivided items of “C1B12: gaming state” is omitted. In the various states related to “C: special state” described here, various states are performed until a touch is detected or until a predetermined condition (elapsed time or the like) is satisfied after the touch is detected. The touch effect is not to be executed.

  The above-mentioned “C2: Power-off recovery state” means a state in which the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (in this case, in particular, the main board 102) has recovered and the power-off has been resolved. The item “C2B1: gaming standby state (normal demonstration display)” and the item “C2B2: gaming state” similar to the above-mentioned “C1: power-off state” may be provided in the “C2: power-off recovery state”. it can.

  FIG. 35A shows an example of an effect output according to the state of “C2B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”. In FIG. 35 (a), a power interruption return notification area 365 appears in the upper right corner of the display content (standby screen A) in the above-described “B11: game standby A (normal demo display)”, and “power has been turned on. Is displayed.

  FIG. 35B shows a display example according to the state of “C2B2: gaming state”. In the example of FIG. 35 (b), a central message display area 371 appears in the center of the image where the display areas of the effect symbols (190a to 190c) appear, and the message "Electrified. The symbol is changing now. The game is displayed. " That is, in the example of FIG. 35 (b), the power is turned off during the symbol change, and thereafter, the power is returned without the RWM clear operation being performed (the power is turned off), and the effect symbols (190a to 190c) are displayed. The screen display shows a state in which the display area is displayed and the display is restarted with the message display related to the energization added.

  After this, the effect output mode is to restart from the variable display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c) in accordance with the information content transmitted by the above-described command at the time of power-off recovery, or to use a predetermined stop symbol. Various modes can be adopted, such as restarting from the stop display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c).

  Here, even if there is a touch detection, the touch effect in the state related to the recovery from the power failure is not performed until the initialization notification performed when the power is turned on ends. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the touch effect from functioning as a misleading game clerk or player, for example, with respect to the initialization notification. Note that the initialization notification at the time of power-on can be exemplified by displaying characters such as "Power-up is in progress. Please wait for a while."

  The above-mentioned “C3: Setting change (probability change) state” means that the setting change is being changed. Further, the above-mentioned “C4: state during setting display (1 to 6)” means a state in which the numerical value of the set value changed by the setting change operation is being displayed. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting display 701 displays a numerical value corresponding to the set value.

  As an example of an effect output relating to the “C3: state in which setting is being changed (probability changing)”, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and (c), characters such as “setting is being changed” and “setting is being displayed” Examples such as display can be exemplified. In the effect output example of FIG. 36 (b), the message “Setting is being changed. After the setting change is completed, the game is shifted to normal game by closing the frame door” in the lower message display area 364. . In the effect output example of FIG. 36 (c), a lower center message display area 370 appears in the lower part of the center of the screen, and the message “Setting is being changed. At the end of the setting change, the frame door is closed to shift to the normal game. Message is displayed.

  Here, “setting is being changed” means that the current setting value is displayed and the setting can be changed. “Setting is being displayed” means that the current setting value is being displayed. This means that the settings cannot be changed, though. More specifically, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder (809) and the set value at that time is displayed on the setting display (807) during the "setting display". Cannot be performed. This corresponds to the processing when it is determined that the RWM clear switch has not been input (S133: NO) in the setting change processing shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the touch effect by the image is not executed in any of the states of “setting change” and “setting display”. In the present embodiment, an image indicating the state is displayed during the state, but the image may not be displayed at all.
<Production based on touch detection>

Subsequently, as the items of the above-described “effect performed based on touch detection”, “D: content of touch effect” and “E: touch effect selection criteria” can be mainly mentioned. Among these items, “D: touch effect content” includes items indicating items such as how to perform an effect (touch effect) related to a touch operation through what kind of device. The item “E: touch effect selection criteria” includes items indicating items based on which items a plurality of various touch effects are selected.
<< D: Touch production content >>

  The above “D: the content of the touch effect” can be divided into, for example, “D1: output destination of effect”, “D2: effect data”, and “D3: only state change”. Further, among these, “D1: output destination of the effect” includes “D11: speaker”, “D12: lamp”, and “D13: image display device”. "D11: speaker" can use the above-mentioned speaker 21, and "D12: lamp" can use various LEDs for effects. Here, the output destinations of the touch effect are enumerated, but which output destinations and combinations are used in each state of the gaming machine will be described later.

  In addition, “D13: image display device” may use the effect display device 60 (including a case where a plurality of display bodies are used). Furthermore, for "D13: image display device", items such as "D131: same as decorative design display device" and "D132: different from decorative design display device" can be provided.

  Among these, “D131: same as decorative design display device” means that a touch effect by an image is performed using the same display device as the effect display device 60 that displays the above-described effect design 190 (FIGS. 8A and 8B). Means to do. The effect output accompanying the touch detection as shown in FIG. 34 (b) and the like can be said to belong to the classification of "D131: same as decorative design display device". Further, “D132: separate from the decorative design display device” means a display device provided separately from the effect display device 60 (for example, a second liquid crystal display device such as a device provided in a frame or an LED display device (illustrated in FIG. Abbreviated) etc.).

  As for the above-mentioned "D2: effect data", items such as "D21: shared with others" and "D22: dedicated" can be provided. Among these, "D21: shared with other" means that the effect data for the touch effect is shared with the effect data for the effect other than the touch effect. “D22: Exclusive” means that the effect data for the touch effect is dedicated, and is not shared with the effect data for the effect other than the touch effect.

  Here, "shared with effect data" may include a mode in which some effect data is shared and other effect data is not shared. Furthermore, the effect data configuration and effect mode, such as sharing part of the effect data for the touch effect with the effect data for other effects, and dedicating other effect data for the touch effect, are also adopted. Is possible.

  For example, the character display of “Welcome” in the touch effect area 362 illustrated in FIG. 34B can be considered to use the effect data dedicated to the touch effect. Further, for example, in a case where image data used even during a symbol change is used as a touch effect, the effect data can be considered to be shared.

The above-mentioned “D3: Perform only state change” means, for example, that when there is a touch detection, only the effect mode is changed, and no special effect is performed as a touch effect. An effect mode in which few so-called rare characters or scenes do not appear can be exemplified. And, such "D3: Perform only state change" can be said to be an example of an effect mode in which "D2: Effect data" is set to "D21: Shared with other items".
<< E: Touch production selection criteria >>

  Next, the aforementioned “E: touch effect selection criteria” will be described. The “E: touch effect selection criterion” is, in other words, a criterion for selecting what kind of touch effect is to be executed, and in a broad sense, includes whether or not a touch effect is to be executed. The “E: touch effect selection criterion” may be divided into, for example, “E1: game state (at touch timing)”, “E2: number of operations”, and “E3: customization setting”. it can. Of these, “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)” means an effect mode in which a target to be selected or a selected touch effect differs depending on the game state when a touch is detected. I have.

  The “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)” includes “E11: gaming state related to payout” and “E12: gaming state not related to payout”. Furthermore, as for “E12: game state not related to the payout”, “E121: RTC”, “E122: type of demonstration (type of B1)”, “E123: abnormal / error state”, “E124: effect button” Operation "and the like.

  Here, the above-mentioned “E11: gaming state related to payout” can be said to be one of the subdivided states of “B2: gaming state” (FIG. 22). Specifically, “B2: gaming state” includes items of “B21: symbol fluctuation state” and “B22: hitting state” as described above, and these states include a big hit state and a high hit state. A game state, such as a probability state, an electric support state, and the like, in which the number of payouts is larger than in the normal state, is included.

  "E121: RTC" related to the above-mentioned "E12: game state not related to a ball-out" is to select whether or not to perform a touch effect and the content of execution of a touch effect based on an RTC (real-time clock) that measures real time. For example, when it is determined that the touch detection has changed at a timing in which the timing result of the RTC is within a predetermined time zone, it means an effect mode in which a touch effect corresponding to the timing result is determined. ing. In addition, “E122: type of demonstration (type of B1)” indicates which of the various types of demonstrations (B11 to B14) in “B1: game standby state” described above is being performed. Refers to an effect mode in which a touch effect is determined.

  Further, the above-mentioned “E123: Abnormal / error state” indicates what kind of state is difficult to consider normally, or what kind of abnormality or error is detected when a touch is detected. This means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected depending on whether an abnormality or an error has occurred. Further, as this “E123: abnormal / error state”, it is difficult to consider normally “E1231: touch state from power-on” or “E1232: non-touch ball input”, for example, winning An unpredictable state or the like can be determined as a selection criterion parameter. Then, as the “state in which winning is not expected”, touch detection is performed from a predetermined time after power-on or a predetermined time when the standby screen is displayed, from the start point to the ball entry timing after the start point. Can be exemplified.

  Further, in consideration of the maintenance of the gaming machine, etc., when the gaming shop clerk opens the glass door (15) and manually wins the starting winning opening (62 or 63) directly without operating the firing handle (20). There is. Even in such a case, a command is transmitted from the main board (102) to the sub main board (301), and an effect is executed in the same manner as in a normal game. Then, when a touch is detected during the fluctuation display of the symbol, an effect corresponding to the state is output. It can be said that such a state is also included in the above-mentioned “state in which a winning cannot be assumed”.

  “E1231: Touch state from power-on” described above means a situation where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on while touching the touch sensor (touch switch 310). In such a situation, even if the firing handle (20) is touched before the power is turned on, the touch detection is not continued due to the power-off before the power is turned on. Can be avoided. Alternatively, since such a situation can be considered to be an abnormal power-up situation, it is also possible to perform an effect output for notifying that the power supply is abnormal.

  In addition, “E1232: Case of entering ball in non-touch state” indicates that entry to any one of the entrances (winning opening) is detected in a situation where contact with the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is not detected. It means a situation like that. For example, as such a situation, it is possible to consider a case where there is a fraud involving power-on. Then, in such a situation, it is conceivable to perform an effect output for notifying that the power supply is abnormally turned on.

  The above-mentioned “E124: operation of effect button” means a situation where the operation button 22 is operated and touch detection is further performed. For example, the type of the touch effect (the effect performed based on the touch detection) depending on whether or not the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is operated before the execution of the touch effect (within a predetermined period before the execution). And a control mode in which the presence or absence of execution is determined.

  More specifically, when the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is not operated within a predetermined period (several seconds before) before the touch detection, the touch effect using an image or a sound is executed, and the effect button (the operation button 22) is operated, a touch effect is executed only by voice, or a touch effect is not executed.

  The aforementioned “E2: number of operations” means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on an operation when the touch operation is repeated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Further, “E3: customization setting” means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on the contents of the customization performed by the above-described environment setting.

Regarding the “effect performed based on the touch detection” as described above, when performing various processes based on the touch detection, the payout of a prize ball or a symbol game (a stop result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is performed). It is considered that it is preferable not to affect the progress of the game which gives a profit based on the above.
<Other processing executed based on touch detection>

Next, as the items of the above-mentioned "other processing executed based on touch detection", "F: change of effect state", "G: change of effect", "H: trigger parameter of touch effect" Things related to ".
<< E: Touch production selection criteria >>

Of these, “F: effect state change” can be defined as “F1: effect state change” or “F2: effect state change” based on touch detection. Examples of the effect mode of “F1: accompanied by change of the effect state” include a mode of “F11: complete transition” and a mode of “F12: return after a certain period of time * stay for a certain period after the operation effect”.

  The above-mentioned “F11: complete transition” means an effect mode in which after the effect condition is changed, the effect condition does not return to the original effect condition unless the change in the effect condition is selected. Further, the above-mentioned "F12: Return after a certain period of time * Stay for a certain period after the operation effect" means that after the effect state is changed, the effect state remains after the change for a predetermined time and the predetermined time elapses. This means an effect mode that returns to the original effect state.

Examples of the above-mentioned "F2: no change in the effect state" include, in addition to those without any change in the effect state, an effect mode such as "F21: no change in the effect state in a specific situation". . As the effect mode of “F21: no change in the effect state in a specific situation”, under a predetermined condition (or selected by lottery), even if a touch is detected, the effect state changes. And the effect of not performing.
<< G: Direction change >>

  The above-mentioned “G: change of effect” indicates what kind of effect change is performed based on the touch detection, and includes “G1: change of effect that does not affect the ball appearance” and “G2: change of effect. Change of production that affects the appearance of balls). The term "affects the ball" here means, in addition to a change in the effect that directly affects the ball, such as a change in the execution control state of a notification effect that is advantageous to a player such as a hit notification. The fluctuation time occupying within a certain time varies depending on the fluctuation time, which includes indirect ones such as a case where the fluctuation efficiency changes.

  In other words, if the fluctuation time is short on average, the number of fluctuations within a certain time (for example, one hour) can be relatively increased, and the amount of payouts including a general prize and a big hit can be theoretically reduced. It is thought to increase. Conversely, if the fluctuation time is long on average, it is considered that the number of fluctuations within a certain time is relatively small, and the payout amount is theoretically small. The above-mentioned “G1: change of effect that does not affect the ball appearance” and “G2: change of the effect that influences the ball appearance” are determined based on such a concept.

  The “G1: change of effect that does not affect the appearance of balls” can also be referred to as a change that does not change the fluctuation time on the side of the sub-main board 301. Includes "G11: change of notice system", "G12: change of background, character, etc.", and "G13: change of decorative design (including those attached to the design)" including change of production mode and change of frequency. , "G14: change of hold display" or the like can be considered.

  The above-mentioned “G11: change of notice system” includes “G111: change in advance notice”, “G112: change in advance notice”, “G113: change in selection ratio”, and “G114: change in selection contents”. * It is not just the frequency. The change related to “G111: advance notice” means that an effect of the advance notice in a change after the change (the change) at that time is selected based on the touch detection. Further, the change related to “G112: the change notice” means that the effect of the notice in the change (the change) at that time is selected based on the touch detection.

  FIGS. 41A and 41B show an example of an effect relating to “G112: the change notice” of “G11: Change of notice system”. FIG. 41A illustrates an example of an effect display before a notice (touch notice) related to a touch effect is executed, and FIG. 41B illustrates an example of an effect display when a touch notice is performed. ing. Among these, in FIG. 41 (a), a cat character 384 holding a fish in a normal reach appears at the center of the screen as an expectation suggesting effect indicating a possibility of a big hit due to a change during execution. The degree of expectation is different depending on the color and type of fish that the cat character 384 that has appeared is held, and the color and type of fish (e.g. (Expected degree of notice) is configured to change stepwise.

  In this state, if there is no change in the touch detection, the cat character 384 is moved to the left of the screen in accordance with the content determined at the time of determining the content of the notice, and is moved in accordance with the progress of the above-described symbol. An expected degree suggestion effect is executed so as to change (or not change) the color of the fish. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes after the appearance of the cat character 384, the cat character 384 changes to the monster character 385 (touch change) as shown in FIG. 385 is changed to the effect of moving to the left of the screen. At this time, the monster character 385 is changed to a monster character 385 having an expected degree corresponding to the color of the fish held by the cat character 384 (for example, if the color of the fish is blue, the body color is a blue beast).

  In addition, if the expectation of the notice is changed according to the progress of the subsequent symbols (the color of the fish is changed from blue to red, and the reliability of each color will be described later), it is a privilege due to the change in the touch detection. When the character changes, the monster character 385 of a color (for example, yellow or red) within the expected degree of change after the change can be used. Further, as the expectation of the notice, it is possible to provide a plurality of different types of cat characters 384 and monster characters 385, respectively, so that the expectations of the jackpot and the reach development are different.

  For example, as the fish held by the cat character 384, coloring fish such as red, yellow, blue, and white are provided, and the above-described degree of expectation increases in order from white to red. The monsters are colored in red, yellow, blue, white, etc., so that the above expectations increase in order from white to red. In addition, the size, type, and fish of cats and monsters It is conceivable that the degree of expectation is represented by a combination of a color and an accompanying item, such as, etc.

  Further, with the touch detection, the color of the fish added by the cat character 384 changes to one having a high degree of expectation, or the color of the monster character 385 that has appeared due to the touch detection changes due to the second or subsequent touch detection. Effect control can be performed so as to cause Further, it is also possible to adopt an effect control mode in which the color of the monster character 385 is sequentially changed by repeating the second and subsequent touch detections. Further, as the announcement effect, the effect control described above can be performed by causing the monster character 385 to appear from the beginning without causing the cat character 384 to appear.

  In addition, it is also preferable to output a character or voice that indicates that there is a possibility that the character may change when the touch detection changes, or that the reliability notification may change. It is possible to promote a new game effect by operation. Further, as “G11: change of notice system”, after the notice being executed is changed due to the change of the touch detection, a predetermined condition (for example, the touch is performed again during the reach after the next change) after the change of the touch detection Until the detection is changed, a jackpot is performed, or the game shifts to a predetermined game standby demonstration, etc.), the production using the cat character 384 is performed using the monster character 385. Is changed to In addition, the example in which the content is changed from the running notice on the basis of the change in the touch detection is exemplified. However, when the touch detection changes, a notification or suggestion such as "the notice character is changed from the next change" is displayed. May be executed in advance, and the corresponding notice character or the like may be changed from the next change.

  Further, the above-mentioned “G113: change of selection ratio” means performing an effect drawing that changes the selection frequency of various effects. In addition, “G114: Change of selected content * not only frequency” refers to effects of backgrounds and characters used for effects on the sub-main board 301 side in addition to the selection frequencies (selection ratios) of various effects. This means that the contents (production components) are changed within a range in which the fluctuation time does not change based on the touch detection. In other words, in other words, when the same variation pattern is executed, the variation is maintained while maintaining the variation time to “change of the announcement due to details of the production (specific announcement)” determined on the sub-control side. It can also be said.

  FIGS. 42A to 42D schematically show an example of a selection table related to a notice effect before and after a touch change. Among these, FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) show a selection table relating to a notice effect (the change notice effect) regarding the change result (whether lottery result) at that time, and FIGS. (D) shows a selection table relating to a notice effect (pre-read notice effect) on a fluctuation result (whether a lottery result or not) from the next time. FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) show selection tables for a predetermined notice group (here, notice group α). FIGS. 42 (c) and 42 (d) show other predetermined notice groups. Of the notice group (in this case, notice group β).

  Further, FIG. 42A shows an example of a selection table for a notice effect in each change before touch detection, and FIG. 42B shows a selection table for a notice effect in each change after touch detection. An example is shown. Similarly, FIG. 42 (c) shows an example of a selection table relating to a pre-reading advance effect before touch detection, and FIG. 42 (d) shows an example of a selection table relating to a pre-fetch advance effect after touch detection. .

  Note that each of the notices in FIGS. 42A to 42D is any one of the notices A to D so that the explanation is not complicated here, and there is a case where these notices are not performed. It is assumed. Furthermore, the symbols “A” to “D” in the notices A to D do not indicate differences in the contents of the notices, but are used to distinguish the kinds of notices in the selection tables in FIGS. 42A to 42D. belongs to.

  For example, the use image and the production mode of the notice A shown in FIG. 42A are determined in principle not to be the same as the use image and the production mode of the notice A shown in FIGS. 42B to 42D. Have been. This is the same for the notices C to D. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same use image or effect mode may be adopted between notices having the same symbol (A to D) in each selection table.

  Further, taking the chart of FIG. 42A as an example, columns (rows) of 0 to 5, 10 to 30, 31 or more are provided as the variation pattern numbers. As for the notice A, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 40%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 40%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 and higher are selected at a rate of 20%. It has become.

  As for the notice B, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 14%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 35%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 and over are selected at a rate of 35%. It has become. Further, as for the notice C, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 1%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 10%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 or more are selected at a rate of 44%. It has become.

  For the notice D, the selection ratio is 0% for any of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 31 or more. Is not to be done. Further, the ratio of not giving a notice is that the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is 45%, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 15%, and the variation pattern of variation pattern number 31 or more is 1%. I have.

  The relationship between the variation pattern, the advance notice, and the selection ratio as described above is determined as follows. That is, here, 100 variation patterns having variation pattern numbers 0 to 99 are provided. The above-described variation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 10 to 30, 31 and above are included in the 0th to 99th variation patterns.

  Here, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are non-reach fluctuations that are fluctuations that do not become reach (for example, the fluctuation pattern random numbers in FIG. 11A are 15000 to 49999 out of 5000 to 49999). The fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 6 to 9 are those related to special non-reach fluctuations that are not suitable for the above-mentioned notice group α even though they are non-reach fluctuations (for example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 12,500 to 14999). Further, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are outliers and are related to reach fluctuation (hereinafter, referred to as “weak SP reach”) having relatively low jackpot reliability (for example, in FIG. 11A). The variation pattern random numbers are 5000 to 12499 out of 5000 to 49999, and the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 31 to 49 are out of reach variation with relatively high jackpot reliability (here, “strong SP reach”). (For example, the variation pattern random numbers in FIG. 11A are 0 to 4999).

  Further, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 50 to 99 are those of the hit fluctuation which is a hit. The variation pattern numbers 50 to 99 include a variation pattern number that is indistinguishable from the variation pattern numbers 10 to 49 and a special hit type that is different from the variation pattern numbers 10 to 49. And fluctuations are included. In order to avoid complicating the explanation, the notice A is a “weak notice” with a relatively low expectation of the big hit, the notice B is a “medium notice” with a medium expectation of the big hit, and the notice C is the big notice. It is assumed that the expectation is "weak notice" which is relatively high.

  Based on these facts, the selection ratio of the notice group α using the selection table shown in FIG. According to the example shown in FIG. 42A, before the change processing of the notice group selection ratio by touch detection, the change at that time (the change) is based on the change pattern 5 (the change pattern with the change pattern number 5). In the case of a change (non-reach symbol change), the selection ratio of the notice group α is such that the probability of executing the notice A is 40%, the probability of executing the notice B is 14%, the probability of executing the notice C is 1%, The probability that the notice of the notice group α is not executed is 45%.

  Similarly, when the variation is a symbol variation of the weak SP reach based on the variation pattern 30 (variation pattern number 30), the selection ratio of the notice group α is such that the probability of executing the notice A is 40%, The probability of executing the notice B is 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 10%, and the probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 15%.

  Similarly, when the variation is a symbol variation (hit variation) based on the variation pattern 31 (strong SP reach) or the variation pattern 50, the selection ratio of the notice group α is such that the probability of executing the notice A is 20% and the notice B is Is 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 44%, and the probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 1%.

  In the example of FIG. 42 (a), since the selection ratio of the variation pattern is determined in this manner, the notification A of the preview group α is a case where the variation pattern of the non-reach outlier with the highest selection rate is selected. However, it can be said that it is highly likely to be executed (40% of the non-reach out-of-reach state). Therefore, it can be said that the notice A of the notice group α has a higher degree of expectation per hit than the case without notice, but has a very low degree of expectation.

  On the other hand, for example, the notice C of the notice group α is very unlikely to be executed in the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern with the highest selectivity (1% of the non-reach out-of-reach), Because of the easy-to-execute notice, it can be said that the expectation is high.

  It should be noted that the variation patterns having variation pattern numbers 0 to 49 have different selectivities at the time of loss. For example, the ratio at which any of the fluctuation patterns 0 to 5 is selected is 80% at the time of the out-of-position, and the ratio at which any of the fluctuation patterns 6 to 9 is selected is 10% at the time of the out-of-position. %. Further, the ratio at which any of the fluctuation patterns No. 10 to No. 30 is selected is 9% at the time of the out-of-position, and the ratio at which any one of the fluctuation patterns No. 31 to No. 49 is selected is 1% at the time of the out-of-position. is there. Any one of the variation patterns 50 to 99 is selected only at the time of hitting.

  For this reason, for the sake of convenience of explanation here, assuming that the hit probability is 1/100, the possibility that the notice A appears at the time of a miss is 80% of the selected ratio for the variation patterns 0 to 5. And 32% (= 80% × 40%) by the product of 40% based on the table of FIG. For the variation patterns No. 10 to No. 30, the product of 9% of the selected ratio and 40% based on the table of FIG. 42A is 3.6% (9% × 40%). Further, for the variation patterns 31 to 49, the product of 1% of the selected ratio and 20% based on the table in FIG. 42A is 0.2% (= 1% × 20%). .

  On the other hand, the possibility that the notice A appears at the time of a hit is 0.2% by the product of 1% of the ratio selected for the variation patterns 50 to 99 and 20% based on the table in FIG. 1% × 20%). From these facts, the rate at which the notice A is executed for one change is 36% (= 32% + 3.6% + 0.2% + 0.2%).

  As described above, the rate at which the notice A is selected at the time of hitting is only 0.2%, and therefore, the reliability at the time when the notice A appears (at the time when it is not known whether it is a hit or not) is 0. 0.4% (= 0.2% + 0.2%).

  On the other hand, after the touch detection, the selection table shown in FIG. 42B is used. In this selection table, for notice A, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are 40%, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are 0%, and the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 31 and higher are 20%. Is to be selected.

  As for the notice B, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 0%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 70%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 or more are selected at a rate of 9%. It has become. Further, as for the notice C, the selection ratio is 0% for each of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and higher, so that the selection is not performed. It has become.

  As for the notice D, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 0%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 29%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 or more are selected at a rate of 70%. It has become. Further, the ratio of no notification is 59% for the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 1% for the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and 1% for the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 31 or more. I have.

  Then, for example, when the notice B appears in the variation pattern No. 10 or more, the benefits beyond the reach for the player are determined and the reliability is higher than the notice B (the ratio selected at the time of strong SP reach or hit). Notice D is newly selectable as an effect. For this reason, after the touch detection, it is possible to change the content and reliability of various notices selected in the notice group α compared to before the touch detection.

  42 (a) and (b), the selection ratio can be changed before and after the touch detection (FIG. 42 (c), FIG. 42 (c)). (D)). Further, in the case of a prefetch notice described later, which is shown in FIGS. 42C and 42D, the sub main board is controlled based on a prefetch command (having information of a prefetch code) serving as advance notification information from the main board (102). The variation pattern number is specified by the CPU 521 of 301.

  The selection ratio described here is designed by the designer based on the concept of how much the reliability of various notices is to be reliable, and is limited to the numerical values and balances illustrated. Not something. For example, the numerical values described here may be changed, but the magnitude relationship of the numerical values may be the same as that described here.

  The above-mentioned “G12: Change of background, character, and the like” means that the background, the character, and the like are changed based on the touch detection for the effects other than the effect of the notice system. In addition, the above-mentioned “G13: change of decorative design (including that attached to the design)” means that the rendering design 190 is made different from the design and classification different from the previous design based on the touch detection. I do. Further, the “attached to the symbol” may include a part other than the element symbol which is the symbol element effect symbol described above (an element symbol which is a non-symbol element effect symbol) and the like.

  The above-mentioned “G14: change of hold display” is to change the hold display in the first hold number display section 196 and the second hold number display section 197 shown in FIGS. 8A, 8B, 33B, and the like. , Which means to change based on touch detection. As the change of the hold display, it is conceivable to change various display modes such as design and arrangement (for example, from a round design in FIG. 8A to a star design in FIG. 33). It is also conceivable to change the arrangement of the first hold number display section 196 and the second hold number display section 197.

  Examples of the above-mentioned “G2: change of effects affecting the ball-out” include “G21: change of change pattern (change time)” and “G22: execution of notification (AT-related function)”. . Among these, as "G21: change of change pattern (change time)", "G211: change of selection ratio" and "G212: change of selection content * not only frequency" can be considered.

  The above-mentioned “G211: change of selection ratio” means that a variation pattern extraction that changes the selection frequency is performed for various variation patterns that define the variation time. In addition, “G212: Change of selected content * not only frequency” means that not only the frequency of selection of various variation patterns but also the variation time itself to be selected, and as described above, the frequency of selection of various effects (selection In addition to the (ratio), on the side of the sub main board 301, the effect (effect component) such as the background or character used for the effect is changed to the one that changes the fluctuating time based on the touch detection. Means. In other words, this is a change in which the fluctuating time is changed to "change of notice (specific notice) due to details of production" determined on the sub-control side when executing the same change pattern. It can be said that there is.

  The above-mentioned “G22: execution of notification (function of AT system)” means that a predetermined notification is executed based on touch detection, and for example, AT which is often used in a spinning-type gaming machine. It is conceivable to use touch detection in combination with game characteristics similar to (assist time).

More specifically, for example, an operation display device 60 presents the operation timing of a touch sensor (touch switch 310), and an example in which an effect develops when a touch is detected at the timing. Furthermore, notification of a launch direction (such as right-handed or left-handed) that is advantageous to the player, notification of a firing timing (such as “hit!” Or “stop!”) That is advantageous to the player, or a combination thereof And a notification of a combination of these and a temporal element (such as "start right-handed after XX seconds!").
<< H: Related to trigger parameters for touch effect >>

  Among the processes executed based on the touch detection, the above-mentioned “H: related to the trigger parameter of the touch effect” includes “H1: a process of a timekeeping timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)”, and “H2: touch detection. Processing of the number of times (addition / subtraction / clearing) "and" H3: other ". The “trigger parameter” here is a parameter (an element of a predetermined variable) which is calculated or set upon the touch detection and is related to execution of a touch effect.

  More specifically, the above-mentioned “H1: the processing of the timekeeping timer (addition, subtraction, clearing, etc.)” is performed by a timekeeping timer (touch effect Timer means for counting the time according to), and specifically, a timer value for determining whether or not the next touch detection is regarded as a valid execution trigger of the effect upon the touch detection. This means that addition, subtraction, clearing, or the like is performed. For example, as an example that corresponds to “specific conditions” shown in “whether or not to perform an effect” (FIGS. 24A and 24B), the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is one of the control states. In such a case, the processing related to the time after the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) corresponds to “H1: the processing of the clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)” here. It will be.

  The above-described “H2: processing of touch detection count (addition / subtraction / clear)” performs processing relating to the number of touch detections in a predetermined period, and performs addition, subtraction, or clearing of a counter value related to counting of the count. Meaning something. In addition, the above-mentioned “H3: other” here is a trigger parameter other than “H1: processing of the timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)” and “H2: processing of the number of touch detections (addition, subtraction, clear)”. It means what can be.

  For example, in the above-described “F: change of the effect state” and “G: change of the effect”, when the effect state or the effect / change pattern is changed, the CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 performs the effect at that time. A process of recognizing and grasping the selection state or updating information related to the performance is executed. The processes necessary for grasping and updating these are exemplified as those corresponding to “H3: Other”. Can be.

  More specifically, for example, as a control mode included in the above-mentioned "F21: the effect state does not change under a specific situation", it is assumed that a touch effect is not executed in four fluctuations after the end of the big hit. And in such a thing, the process which confirms the frequency | count of a change after completion | finish of a big hit can be illustrated as what corresponds to "H3: others."

  In addition, in a gaming machine of a control mode in which a touch effect is not executed during a symbol change or during a specific effect period, when a touch is detected, a condition in which a touch effect can be executed (a condition in which execution is restricted). The process of confirming whether the condition is true can be exemplified.

In addition, with respect to “specific conditions” shown in “whether or not to perform an effect” (FIGS. 24A and 24B), an effect is executed when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”. In addition, when the “specific condition” is “under a win condition”, the process of determining whether or not the symbol variation currently being executed at that time is a hit is “H3: other”. ".
<Permission and Regulation Conditions>
<< J: Setting of permission timing >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned “production permission / regulation conditions” will be described. First, even when the touch detection is changed under each game situation, the "production permission / regulation condition" is not only to execute the production based on the touch detection immediately, but also to produce the production based on the touch detection. Is used to determine whether or not to allow execution. In other words, it is defined that a touch effect is executed as a game state, and that the effect is executed when there is a change in touch detection in a state where the present effect permission / restriction condition is satisfied. It has become. The item of “permission permission / regulation condition” includes “J: setting of permission timing”, and this “J: setting of permission timing” includes a predetermined effect or game state upon touch detection. Permission conditions and restriction conditions are canceled. Furthermore, this “J: setting of permission timing” can be classified into “J1: internal timer” and “J2: composite with other elements”.

  Among these, as “J1: internal timer”, those having “J11: characteristic in time (comparison with variable / 1 fluctuation)” can be exemplified. For example, it is possible to provide a management timer for managing whether the touch effect can be executed (permitted), and to call this management timer an “internal timer”. This management timer (internal timer) can be considered to be included in the clock timer in the aforementioned “H1: Processing of clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)”. The management timer (internal timer) is used to manage whether or not to perform a touch effect (also referred to as “whether or not” or “presence”) and to regulate the touch effect (also referred to as “restriction”). Is possible.

  Regarding the internal timer (management timer), a "variable" timer can be considered in addition to a timer that manages a fixed time. As this “variable”, for example, a time that is determined to execute a touch effect may be changed according to some condition. Examples of the “some condition” include a case where the time during which the execution of the touch effect is permitted differs between the first detection and the second detection.

  Also, there is a "comparison with one variation", as a timer (time) for allowing a touch effect, which can be selected in a gaming machine or a variation pattern that can be selected at that time is longest. May be set for a long time. And it can be said that the determination of the effect output mode based on the touch detection as described above uses the touch detection as a control element for permitting or regulating the output of the effect.

  In such a case, it is possible to optimize the opportunity for executing the touch effect. That is, in a recent symbol game, a symbol variation generally exceeding 180 seconds (a symbol variation having a high degree of expectation like “super 1” in FIG. 11) is performed as the longest variation time. On the other hand, if the time during which the execution of the touch effect is permitted is not provided longer than such a time, the opportunity to execute the provided touch effect may be lost. Therefore, based on the relationship with the time of one change, the opportunity to execute the touch effect is appropriately set by permitting the execution of the touch effect after a lapse of time shorter than the long time (eg, 180 seconds) as described above. It is possible to effectively utilize the touch effect.

  The above-mentioned "J2: compounding with other elements" includes "J21: presence / absence of operation of effect button", "J22: presence / absence of twisting operation of handle", "J23: command from main board", and "J24: game". Machine state (situation) ", which means that the touch effect is permitted or restricted in combination with one or more of these elements. Among these, “J21: presence / absence of operation of production button” determines a condition for permitting or regulating a predetermined production of a combination of operation of operation button (production button) 22 and touch operation. It means that it is an element to do.

  The above-mentioned “J22: presence / absence of a twisting operation of the handle” is based on the assumption that the combination of the twisting operation of the firing handle 20 and the touch operation is a condition for permitting or restricting the production, and “J23: a command from the main board” is a main This means that reception of a predetermined command from the board 102 to the sub main board 301 and a touch operation are combined.

  As the above-mentioned “J24: state (situation) of the gaming machine”, “J241: special state such as abnormality”, “J242: game standby state”, and “J243: specific effect state (subdivided)” be able to. Among these, "J241: special state such as abnormality" indicates that touch detection has been performed in a state where an error has been detected or in a special situation where a situation that is unlikely to occur in a normal game has occurred. It means that it is a condition.

  The above-mentioned “J242: game standby state” means that, for example, touch detection in each state in the above-mentioned “B1: game standby state” is set as a condition for permitting or regulating effects. . Further, the above-mentioned “J243: specific production state (subdivided state)” means that the detection of touch during various production states is used as a condition for permitting or regulating production. ing.

  For example, in the case of “B1: standby state (normal demonstration display)”, the effect is produced according to the effect state of “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”. That permit or regulate the above. Further, in the case of "B2: gaming state", the permission or regulation of the production is performed in accordance with the production state related to "B21: symbol fluctuation state" (points in which production mode the user is staying in). Can be illustrated. Further, in the case of "B22: hitting", the permission or regulation of the staging is performed according to the staging state (staging pattern) during the hitting, or the probability is changed according to the distinction between the hitting and the normal hitting, and the number of extended rooms. An example of permission and regulation of production can be given.

  Note that the “permission” and “restriction” described here are not limited to permitting (all permitting) or restricting (all restricting) all elements in the effect. For example, depending on the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 10, one of a plurality of types of effects that may be executed as a touch effect may be permitted (partially permitted) or restricted (partially restricted). It is also possible to

  Also, this “J2: composite with other elements” can be combined with, for example, the above-mentioned “J1: internal timer”. In this case, in the game standby state (such as “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)”), the operation of the operation button (22) or the like is performed before the predetermined elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (eg, about 20 seconds). For example, even if the operation unit is operated, when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (20 seconds or the like), output of an effect (standby screen B or the like) triggered by subsequent touch detection is allowed. it can. Here, the “predetermined time” is, for example, assuming that the time required to execute the corresponding touch effect is 6 seconds, and the touch effect for 6 seconds is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times or more). A possible period (here, about 20 seconds) is considered.

Furthermore, when returning from the power-off state, regardless of whether the return is performed by the normal return operation (return in the case of NO in S111 or S113) or a specific return operation (return operation in the case of YES in S113), the internal timer is used. Can be set to a predetermined value (such as the above-mentioned “predetermined time” of 20 seconds).
<Other 1>
<< K: Change of touch state >>

  Subsequently, the items of “other 1” described above include “K: change in touch state”, “L: touch detection method”, and “M: transmission method to sub”. Of these, “K: change in touch state” means that the presence or absence of contact with the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is used for game control. As for “K: change in touch state”, “K1: non-touch → touch” and “K2: touch → non-touch” can be considered.

Of these, “K1: non-touch → touch” means that the state changes from a non-touch state in which the touch sensor (310) is not touched to a touch state in which the touch sensor (310) is touched. Further, “K2: touch → non-touch” means that the state changes from a touch touching the touch sensor (310) to a non-touch state not touching the touch sensor (310).
<< L: Touch detection method >>

The above-mentioned "L: Touch detection method" means that the difference in how the touch is detected is utilized for game control. As for “L: touch detection method”, “L1: touch only” and “L2: including handle operation” can be considered. Among these, “L1: touch only” means that the game control is performed on condition that only the operation on the touch sensor (310) is performed. “L2: Including handle operation” means that game control is performed on the condition that both the operation on the touch sensor (310) and the rotation operation of the firing handle 20 are performed. When "L1: touch only" is used in the pachinko gaming machine 10, the touch detection processing can be easily performed. Further, when "L2: Including handle operation" is adopted, it is possible to prevent a touch effect from being performed when a player accidentally touches the firing handle (20), for example. In addition, it is possible to extract the intention of the player to start the game and use it for subsequent processing.
<< M: Transmission method to sub >>

  The above-mentioned “M: transmission method to sub” described above means items such as when the touch signal detected by main substrate 102 is transmitted to sub main substrate 301. As for “M: transmission method to sub”, “M1: transmission at all times in principle (main → sub)” and “M2: transmission by grasping the situation (main → sub)” can be considered.

Among these, “M1: principle transmission at all times (main → sub)” means that a touch signal (including a signal indicating the content of the touch signal) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main unless there is a special condition such as a communication error. This means that data is always transmitted to the substrate 301. “M2: grasp situation and transmit (main → sub)” means that the main board 102 determines the situation at that time, grasps the situation, and, in a predetermined case, generates a touch signal ( (Including a signal representing the content of the touch signal) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.
<Utilization form related to change in touch state>
<< Pros and cons of conducting the performance >>

  Next, a result of examining a specific mode for utilizing the change in the touch state for effect control will be described. FIGS. 24A and 24B summarize the pros and cons of performing an effect when a change in the touch state is detected in various game states. Here, “whether or not a production” can be paraphrased into “whether a production is possible” or “whether there is a production”.

  For example, FIGS. 24A and 24B show “change state”, “number of changes, etc.”, “target”, and “state of the gaming machine” from the left of the chart. Of these, the upper row in the “change state” indicates a case where the touch detection has changed from the “absent” state to the “present” state, and the lower row indicates that the touch detection has changed from the “present” state to the “absent” state. This indicates a case where the state has changed.

  The above “number of changes” indicates an item regarding the number of state changes of the touch signal. “First time” indicates the first change of the touch signal, and “predetermined time and later” indicates the state change after the second time. Further, "specific conditions" represents specific conditions other than the number of changes, and indicates that the operation of the operation button 22 or the like has been performed as an example.

  Here, as the “state change” or “change”, for example, a change from the on state (or off state) of the touch signal to the off state (or on state) can be exemplified. Further, the intensity of the touch signal (for example, the height of the voltage) may be changed stepwise, and may be referred to as “state change” or “change” including step change. The items such as “first time” in the “number of changes” are when the touch detection changes from the “absent” state to the “present” state, and when the touch detection changes from the “present” state to the “absent” state. Are common to both cases.

  As the above-mentioned “object”, “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” can be considered. The meanings of these items can be the same as “D13: image display device”, “D11: speaker”, and “D12: lamp” of “D1: effect output destination” shown in FIG. . Further, these items of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are commonly defined for each item such as “first time” in “number of changes”.

  As described above, the change in the touch detection includes a change when the player changes from a state in which the firing handle 20 is gripped to a released state, and a change in a state in which the player grips the firing handle 20 from a state in which the firing handle 20 is not gripped. There are two cases where the operation is changed, and the operation may be performed a plurality of times during a certain period such as during the same game state. Further, a specific condition is satisfied at a timing that cannot be completely predicted, such as a state in which an effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is operated, and a touch detection is performed before or after the occurrence of the state in which the specific condition is satisfied. May change. For this reason, in the following, depending on each state of the gaming machine, the change mode of the touch detection, whether or not under the specific condition, etc., the presence / absence of execution and the content of execution in the touch effect are determined, and for the determined content, refer to FIG. It will be explained while doing.

  FIG. 24 shows a state where the touch detection changes in a predetermined manner under normal conditions (non-specific conditions) in each state of the gaming machine (shown as “the state of the gaming machine”), and under the specific conditions. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a concept of a touch effect to be executed when the value of “.” Changes. The “state of the gaming machine” includes “setting change relation”, “waiting for game”, “during symbol change” shown in FIG. 24 (a), “during hit” shown in FIG. During probable change (electric support). Among these, “setting change relation” defines “setting change” and “setting display” related to the above-described setting change. The above-mentioned “setting change” indicates a situation in which the setting change is started and the setting change is being performed, and “during display of the setting” indicates a situation in which the setting value is being displayed.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, symbols of “○”, “Δ”, and “×” are used. Among these, the symbol “○” indicates that the effect of the device listed as “target” is “executed”. Further, the symbol “△” indicates that the effect of the “target” device may be “executed (including a concept of being executed under certain conditions or being executed only by a part of the device)”. The symbol “x” indicates “do not execute”. Here, the “constant condition” associated with the symbol “△” indicates, for example, that the condition is limited to the case of winning in a lottery with a predetermined probability. Examples of the lottery with the predetermined probability include a lottery in which the winning is performed with a common probability regardless of the set value, and a lottery in which the winning ratio differs for each set value (FIG. 12) described above.
<<<< Setting change relation >>>>

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the state of the gaming machine is “setting change related” (one of “setting change” and “setting display”), touch detection is performed for the first time. When the status changes from “No” to “Yes” or “Yes” to “No” (“First”), a part of the LED (“Lamp”) provided on the gaming machine frame or game board was used. A touch effect is performed (indicated by “△”), and control is performed so that a touch effect by the liquid crystal display device (“image”) and the speaker (“voice”) is not performed. On the other hand, if a change in the touch state is detected again after the change in the touch state is detected for the first time (in the case where it is indicated as “after the predetermined time”), if only the touch effect by “image” and “sound” is used, In addition, it is configured not to execute the touch effect using a part of the “lamp” (indicated by “x”). Further, under “specific conditions” such as after an effect button (operation button 22 or the like) is operated during setting change or setting display, the touch effect is executed even when a change in the touch state is detected for the first time. Control (not shown). In other words, in the setting change state, the output of the effect based on the detection by the touch detection unit may not be performed regardless of the detection state of the touch detection unit and / or the rotation operation detection unit. It is possible.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, in the case of a state related to a setting change such as “setting is being changed” or “setting is being displayed”, whether or not a touch effect is performed even if touch detection is performed Even if it is executed, only the effect of notifying the touch detection is executed. By doing so, the touch effect does not hinder the setting confirmation and the setting change operation, and it is possible to confirm whether the touch detection is normally performed even during the setting change operation or the like.
<<< Game waiting >>>

  The “during game standby” of the “game machine state” described above includes “demo screen”, “adjustment screen”, “variable standby screen”, “initialization notification (medium)”, and “abnormality notification (medium)”. ]. Among these, the “demo screen” is the display state of the aforementioned “B11: game standby A (normal demo display)”, and the “adjustment screen” is “B13: game standby C (production) related to environment setting (customization) such as volume. The display state of “(voice setting screen)” and the “variable standby screen” correspond to the display state of “B12: game standby B (symbol stopped)”, respectively.

  Further, the “initialization notification” during the above-described game standby indicates that the initialization notification is being performed, and the above-described “C2B1: the power-off recovery state and the game standby state” and the subsequent initialization are performed. The notification corresponds to the state during the execution period.

  In addition, the “abnormality notification” during the above-mentioned game standby is an error that can return the control state of the gaming machine to the normal state without restarting the power if the error is released (referred to as a “returnable error” or the like). Is possible), and corresponds to the above-described state of “B1: game standby state” and during the execution of the notification of the returnable error.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, during the game standby displaying the “demo screen”, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence” for the first time, “image”, “sound”, Control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using a “lamp” (indicated by “○”). Also, after the touch detection first changes from “absence” to “presence”, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), under a certain condition (for example, every set value) Control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using “voice” with the provided lottery results based on the winning ratio (indicated by “△”). Furthermore, under the “specific conditions” such as after the effect button is operated during the game standby displaying the “demo screen”, the touch detection may change from “absent” to “present” for the first time. However, control is performed so as to execute only the touch effect by voice without performing the touch effect using “image” and “lamp” which is normally performed (indicated by “△”).

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even if the change is “first time” (indicated by “x”). . Also, under specific conditions such as when the touch detection has changed from “presence” to “absence” a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), or after an operation of an effect button has been performed during a game standby, the same conditions are also used. In the same way as when touch detection changes from "no" to "presence", control is performed so that the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are not executed (indicated by "x") .

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, when the demonstration screen is being displayed, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection that occurs when the game ends is changed from “Yes” to “No”. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "absence" to "presence", the touch effect is configured to be performed, and an unauthorized device or the like that forcibly enables the touch detection (for example, the handle and the game island) When a device for connecting a ground wire to each of the metal wires so as to conduct with the metal is removed, it is possible to preferably prevent the touch effect from being executed. Further, only when the touch detection changes from "absence" to "presence" under a predetermined condition, a touch effect different from the normal one is executed, so that the entertainment of the game can be further improved. In particular, when a touch effect is used as an effect at the start of the game, the touch effect is omitted when the player indicates the intention of the game by operating the effect button, etc., to meet the needs of the player. It is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that does not follow the direction.

  Although details will be described later, in the example of FIG. 24 (a), the demonstration screen display is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the symbol stopped, in other words, when a predetermined time or more has elapsed since the game was stopped. Since it is a display screen (such as “standby screen A” in FIG. 33A), the situation where touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” is extremely limited. For this reason, by not performing the touch effect in this situation, the meaning of the original touch effect, such as indicating that the game is ready to be started, is not lost at all.

  Furthermore, in the “adjustment screen” in the “standby game” state, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” for the first time, the touch effect using the “image” is not executed, but the “voice” ”And a touch effect using a part of the“ lamp ”are controlled. In addition, after the touch detection first changes from “absence” to “presence”, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), if only the touch effect using “image” is used, In addition, control is performed so as not to execute a touch effect using “voice” and “lamp”. In addition, during the display of the “adjustment screen” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, even if the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” for the first time, the “voice , And all touch effects including the touch effect using the “lamp” are controlled not to be executed. On the other hand, in the “adjustment screen” in the “standby game” state, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, whether the change is the first time or whether the change is Regardless of whether or not there is, control is performed so that the touch effect is not performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the touch detection that occurs when the game is ended is changed from “Yes” to “No” when the adjustment screen is being displayed, as in the case of the demonstration display, the touch effect is produced. When touch detection changes from "No" to "Presence", the touch effect of "Image" which is likely to hinder the adjustment is not performed, and the effect on the adjustment is relatively small. The touch effect by "voice" and "lamp" is configured to be executed, and both the adjustment work and the touch effect can be appropriately executed. Also, unlike “during demonstration display”, even if multiple touch detections are performed, multiple touch effects are not executed in the adjustment screen, so that the sound related to the touch operation many times (long time) during the adjustment work is performed. No output or lamp output is executed, and the most important adjustment work is not hindered while the adjustment screen is displayed. Further, when the operation of the effect button is used for the adjustment work, if the adjustment work is started, the touch effect is not executed thereafter, so that the most important adjustment work is hindered during the display of the adjustment screen. Nothing.

  Subsequently, in the “floating standby screen” in the “playing standby” state, when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present” for the first time, the touch effect using “voice” and the “lamp” A touch effect using a part is executed, and under predetermined conditions (details will be described later, in the case of a fluctuation standby screen when the display is shifted from the demo screen), control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using an “image”. In addition, after the touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), or after the operation of the effect button is performed, the identification is performed. During the display of the “fluctuating standby screen” under the condition, the touch effect using the “image” and the “lamp” is not performed, and the effect of the “voice” is performed under a certain condition (for example, a lottery with a predetermined probability). (Winning).

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent” for the first time, the touch effect using “image” is not executed, but under a certain condition (for example, a predetermined probability lottery winning). Control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using (voice) or (part of) a lamp. Also, when a change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” for the first time (after the predetermined number of times), even under a certain condition (for example, the touch detection is not performed for the first time). The control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using “speech” or (a part of) a “ramp” in a lottery with a lower probability than in the case where it is performed. On the other hand, during the display of the “fluctuation standby screen” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, the touch effect using the “image” and the “lamp” is not performed. , So that the touch effect is not executed.

  As described above, when the “fluctuating standby screen” is displayed, unlike when the “demo screen” is displayed, even if the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, under a predetermined condition, a part of the effect of the “image” is displayed. Is performed so as not to perform the effect of, for example, the player is likely to stay when the game is interrupted for a short time after the game is stopped, such as lighting a cigarette or drinking a drink. In this case, the effect of the touch effect is reduced as compared with the normal demonstration screen, so that the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable when resuming the game. On the other hand, since the transition to the fluctuating standby screen is often made immediately after the end of the game, if the player interrupts the steering operation, the user is not encouraged to “dwell” so much, and It is preferable to perform an effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in this situation, by performing the production by "sound" and "ramp" without performing the touch production by "image", "does not promote the immersion" and "continue the game" I want to make it happen. " It is to be noted that the present invention can be applied to an “image”, and in that case, it is preferable to execute an effect display including contents that suppresses “inset”.

Furthermore, in the “initialization notification” of the “standby game” state, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence”, and when the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”, In any case, regardless of the status of the “number of changes, etc.” (regardless of whether it is the “first time” or the second time or later), control is performed so that none of the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “ramp” are executed. I do. Also, control is performed so as not to execute any of the “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” effects, regardless of whether the state is under the specific conditions related to the effect button or the like.

  As described above, during the “initialization notification” of the “standby game” state, the execution of the touch effect is performed when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” or “present” to “absent”. It is configured to be meaningless or extremely meaningless under the condition that the player does not normally operate the steering wheel during the initialization notification (power-on notification in a broad sense) period after the power is turned on. Is not performed, the power consumption at the time of initialization can be reduced, the noise of the amusement store can be suppressed, and the discomfort to the operator can be reduced. In this state, for example, a small effect processing such as a part of a “lamp” that can confirm a change in the touch detection state, in other words, a minimum effect in a range where the above-described effect can be obtained is executed. You may.

  Further, in the “abnormality notification” in the state of “waiting for game”, when the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “presence” for the first time, the control is performed so that the touch effect is not performed, while the predetermined number of times (for example, If it is determined that the touch detection has been changed from "absence" to "presence" for about 10 times or more, the "image", "sound" By using the “lamp”, it can be understood that the touch detection is normally performed, and control is performed so as to execute a touch effect indicating that the notification is a normal notification according to the specification. On the other hand, during the “abnormality notification” under specific conditions, such as after the operation of the production button, if the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence”, regardless of the status of “number of changes, etc.” (No matter whether it is the first time or the second time or later).

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absence”, regardless of the status of “the number of changes, etc.”, is it under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed? Regardless of whether or not the touch effect is produced, control is performed so as not to execute the touch effect.

  As described above, during the “abnormality notification” of the “standby game” state, even if the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, the touch effect is not performed unless the operation is performed a plurality of times. Is configured. And, in a state where an abnormality has occurred, usually in a situation where the player does not operate the steering wheel or is inevitably performing a continuous game, it is meaningless or may increase the discomfort by executing the game. I try not to perform a certain production. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discomfort to the player at the time of abnormality. In this state as well, a minute (suppressed) effect that informs that the steering wheel touch has been performed at the time of confirming the abnormal condition, and a production / complex reporting opportunity for confirming the abnormal condition are set. In such a case, an effect of notifying the information or the like, in other words, a minimum (minimum) effect within a range where the above-described effect can be obtained may be executed. It is also preferable to execute a special touch effect such as apologizing for the occurrence of an abnormality when the touch effect is executed after the return screen after the abnormality notification.

Note that, in the case of an error abnormality that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned on again for the above-mentioned recoverable error (which can be referred to as a “recoverable error” or the like), in the present embodiment, the game is In order to make it easy to understand that it is an abnormality that cannot be performed, control is performed so as to stop (prohibit) the production process as a whole, including touch production. It is also possible to execute the same processing as in the case of an unrecoverable error without prohibiting the touch effect even in the case of a recoverable error.
<<<< symbol is changing >>>

  Examples of the “state of the game machine” in the “state of the gaming machine” include “at the time of design stop”, “at the time of reach”, “under special effect”, and “abnormal display screen”. Among these, “at the time of symbol stop” indicates, for example, when the effect symbol (190) is in the stop state immediately before the start of the fluctuation, from the swing fluctuation (temporary stop) state immediately before the stop of the fluctuation until the final stop. It should be noted that a low-speed state, which is not classified as a state in which the symbols are changing, or a part of a plurality of effect symbols is temporarily stopped, and only the remaining part is changing (eg, a low-speed change). Such a situation can be included in "at the time of symbol stop".

  The above “reach time” means the time of reach production. As the “reach time”, for example, a state in which a normal reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37A is performed or an SP reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37B is performed. A state can be cited, and the end of the reach effect can be the timing at which the reach effect ends and the decorative symbol corresponding to the fixed symbol (special symbol mode to be stopped) is temporarily stopped.

  The above-mentioned “specific effect” means a situation in which a predetermined specific effect is being executed. Although the illustration is omitted as the “specific effect”, in a state where the reach effect is not being performed and the symbol is changing, the expectation of the development to reach is high, and the expectation per hit is relatively high. The effect or button operation that is performed during the above-mentioned reach and that promotes the operation of the effect button, in addition to the effect such as performing an effect including a notice indicating that it is being performed, an effect such as notifying a normal symbol hit, etc. Special effects that are performed in parallel with the reach effect, such as the effect performed by, the cut-in effect, the blackout effect (the effect of turning the screen all black) (the execution mode differs or is not executed even in the same reach effect) During a certain effect).

  The “abnormal display screen” described above means that a predetermined image is being displayed when a predetermined abnormality occurs. As the “abnormal display screen”, although not shown, a message notifying the occurrence of an error such as running out of a prize ball, filling the lower plate, opening the door, and an abnormal operation of the movable auditorium while the symbol variation is continued. And those that display symbols and the like can be exemplified.

Of these, when "the pattern is stopped", when the touch detection changes from "absence" to "present" for the first time, the "image stop" has the same And "voice", while controlling not to perform the "ramp" effect. Also, after the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present” and the touch effect is executed, the control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even if the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” again. Further, in the "at design stop" state under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, control is performed so as not to execute any of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even if the change is the first time. Also, under specific conditions such as when the touch detection has changed from “presence” to “absence” a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), or after an operation of an effect button has been performed during a game standby, the same conditions are also used. As in the case where the touch detection changes from "absence" to "presence", the control is performed so that the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are not executed.

  In this way, at the time of "symbol stop" during the symbol change, the effect performed when the symbol is stopped does not hinder the effect only when the touch detection that occurs when the game is restarted changes from "absence" to "present". It is configured so that the touch effect of the degree is executed, for example, when the design is stopped when the reach is out, the voice display such as "Please do your best next time!" The player's psychology when the game is restarted by executing a rendering image that is favorably received in a size or area that does not impair the visibility of the display state of the symbol stop or at such timing Can be expected to be favorable. In addition, there is a player who repeatedly hits the operation unit regardless of whether the effect button is valid or not in order to expect a re-change when the symbol is stopped. For this reason, it is configured such that the touch effect is not executed under specific conditions such as when the effect button is operated while the symbol is stopped or when the vibration is detected so as not to stop the game. Thereby, it can be expected that unnecessary vibration is not given to the gaming machine when the symbol is stopped, and it is also possible to prevent such a player from performing unnecessary effects and giving negative psychology. In addition, when the symbol is stopped, a lamp display indicating the symbol stop is often performed. By not performing a touch effect overlapping this display, it is possible for the player to stop the symbol by the light emission mode of the lamp. It does not hinder recognition.

  In the aforementioned “reach time”, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence” for the first time, none of the touch effects using “image”, “sound” and “lamp” is executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), or after the operation of the effect button is performed, the identification is performed. Neither of the touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is performed during “reach time” under the condition.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the effects of “Image”, “Sound”, and “Lamp” are performed on the condition that the other effects performed during the reach are not affected. Are controlled to be performed. Further, after the touch detection first changes from “presence” to “absence”, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are displayed. At the time of "reach" under specific conditions, such as after the operation of the production button without performing any of the touch productions used, the "image" on the condition that there is no effect on other productions performed during the reach. , "Sound", and "ramp".

  As described above, when the touch detection changes from "absence" to "presence" at the "reach time", the touch effect is not executed. In general, it is possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to a situation in which a player is firing (a situation in which touch detection is “present”). On the other hand, when a reach occurs, the result of the reach becomes the player's greatest interest, so that the player may release the handle from the steering wheel. For this reason, when the operation is performed, an effect related to the reliability is executed in response to the operation, or an effect indicating that it is not disadvantageous for the player to continue firing is performed. With this configuration, a new gaming essence can be expected to be added to the handle operation (touch) at the time of reach. Of course, simply executing an effect that prompts the user to continue firing can be expected to have the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine, and is configured to determine whether or not to execute the effect by reflecting the result of the reach. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the playability.

In the aforementioned “during special production”, as in the case of the above “reach time”, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” for the first time, the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence” for the first time. Later, again, both when the change in the touch state is detected (after the predetermined number of times) and when the “specific effect” is under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, None of the touch effects using "image", "sound" and "lamp" are executed.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, it is assumed that there is no effect on other effects performed during “Specific effect”, as in the case of “Reach” described above. The control is performed so that the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are all performed on the condition. Further, after the touch detection first changes from “presence” to “absence”, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are displayed. Neither of the touch effects used is executed, and under the specific conditions, such as after the operation of the directing button, etc., under “specific effects”, there is no effect on other effects performed during “specific effects”. Control is performed so as to execute any of the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” as conditions.

  As described above, in the same manner as in the case of "reach" during "specific production" as well, when the touch detection changes from "absence" to "presence", the configuration is such that the touch production is not executed. During the “special effect” during the change, it is generally possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to a situation in which the player is firing (a situation in which touch detection is “present”). On the other hand, during the “specific effect”, the result of the symbol change becomes the player's greatest interest, so that the player may release the handle from the steering wheel. For this reason, when the operation is performed, it is disadvantageous to execute, for example, an effect related to the degree of reliability in response to the operation (corresponding to a change in touch detection), or to keep the player firing. By performing an effect or the like that indicates that the game does not change, a new gaming essence can be expected to be added to the handle operation (touch) during the specific effect. Of course, simply executing an effect that prompts the user to continue firing can be expected to have the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine, and determine whether or not to execute the effect by reflecting the result of the fluctuation. By configuring, it is possible to further enhance the playability.

  Further, in the above-mentioned “abnormal display screen”, for the first time, when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present”, and when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present”, the touch detection is subsequently returned to “absent”. When the status changes from “” to “Yes”, control is performed so that the “sound” effect is performed on the condition that there is no effect on other effects performed during the “abnormal display screen”, while “image” and “lamp” Is controlled not to be performed. In addition, at the time of “symbol stop” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, control is performed so as not to execute any of the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp”.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the “Sound” effect is performed on the condition that there is no effect on other effects performed during the “Abnormal display screen”. On the other hand, control is performed such that touch effects of “image” and “lamp” are not executed. Further, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent” and thereafter the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absent” a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or more), and the operation of the effect button is performed. In the case of the “abnormal display screen” under specific conditions such as after the touch, control is performed so that none of the touch effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed.

As described above, during the “abnormal display screen”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, there is no situation in which the player is disadvantaged when the firing is stopped during the abnormal state. In some cases, by performing a touch effect for notifying that the steering wheel operation is not performed because of an abnormality, it is possible to prevent a careless continuation of the game in an abnormal state. Further, in this embodiment, in consideration of the priorities of the abnormality notification and the touch effect, the touch effect is executed only for the voice output. In addition, in a situation where it is disadvantageous for the player when the firing is stopped during the abnormal state, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, it is notified that the firing is maintained. By performing the touch effect by the "voice" to perform, when the stop of the firing is in a game state where it is disadvantageous for the player, the effect is prevented from inadvertently stopping the game by the effect. be able to.
<<<< hit in >>>

  The “hit” in the “game machine state” described above may include “at the start demonstration”, “during the round”, “between rounds”, “during a specific production”, and “at the end demonstration”. . Among these, “at the start demonstration” means a situation where the start demonstration of the big hit game is being executed, and “during round” is a unit game for opening the big winning opening of the big winning opening device 90 in the big hit game. It means that the situation is performed.

  Further, “between rounds” means a situation between “during a round” and the next “during a round”, and “during a specific effect” is a specific situation determined in advance as “a hit”. It means the situation where the production is being performed. Further, “at the time of the end demonstration” means a state where the end demonstration of the big hit game is being executed.

  Of these, at the “start demonstration”, when the touch detection changes from “no” to “present” for the first time, the “voice demonstration” will not affect other performances performed at the “start demonstration”. , While controlling not to execute the effects of “image” and “ramp”. In addition, when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present” and then the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present” again, or when “start” is performed under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed. In the case of "demonstration", control is performed so as not to execute any of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp".

  On the other hand, for the first time, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, or when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, then the touch detection again changes from “Yes” to “No”. When the number of times has changed more than the number of times (for example, two or more times), control is performed so that none of the touch effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed. Furthermore, in the case of “at the start demonstration” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the production button, the touch production of “image” is not performed, and the touch production of “voice” and “lamp” is performed under predetermined conditions. Is controlled to be performed.

  As described above, during the “start demonstration”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, for example, according to the fluctuation content of the big hit, the number of symbol changes to the big hit, and the like. , "Congratulations!", Etc., the effect of congratulating the big hit by the "voice" can be executed, whereby the effect in which the game process and the restart of the launch are associated can be executed. Also, if the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” when the start timing of a big hit game involving a substance such as a round game, such as the end of the “Start Demo”, is changed to “ A configuration in which a touch effect by "sound" or "ramp" that suggests a launch position such as "please right-click!" To indicate that the game state will be switched to "a gaming state that would be disadvantageous if not done" is executed. By doing so, it is possible to notify that the firing operation is executed as a touch effect as needed when the hand is released from the firing handle at inappropriate timing.

  In the above-mentioned “during round”, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” for the first time, none of the touch effects using “image”, “audio”, and “lamp” is executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), or after the operation of the effect button is performed, the identification is performed. Even under the condition “during round”, none of the touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” for the first time, and when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “presence” to “absent” In the case (after the predetermined number of times), none of the touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is executed. Furthermore, "under the round" under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, "image", "sound", "lamp" under the condition that other effects performed during the "round" are not affected. Is controlled so as to perform both effects.

  As described above, the “during round” is a game that is disadvantageous unless fire is performed only when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” under specific conditions, for example, immediately after the start of the round. By imposing inappropriate sound by indicating that it is a “state” or by performing a “sound” or “lamp” touch effect that suggests a launch position such as “Please right-click!” When the hand is released from the firing handle at the timing, it is possible to notify that the firing operation is executed as a touch effect as needed.

  In the "between rounds" described above, when touch detection changes from "no" to "present" for the first time, the same effect as in the above "start demonstration" affects other performances performed between "rounds". On the condition that there is no sound, control is performed so as to perform the effect of “sound”, while control is performed so that the effect of “image” and “lamp” is not executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence” and then changes again from “absence” to “presence”, and “round” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed. In the case of "between", control is performed so as not to execute any of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp".

  On the other hand, for the first time, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, or when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, then the touch detection again changes from “Yes” to “No”. If the number of times has changed more than the number of times (for example, two or more times), control is performed so that none of the touch effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is performed, as in the above “start demonstration”. Furthermore, in the case of “between rounds” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button, the touch effect of “image” is not executed, and the touch effect of “sound” and “lamp” is performed. I do.

  In this way, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately before the start of the next round) during “between rounds”, the touch effect by “voice” is executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at the timing, a blessing effect such as “Nice!” Is executed by “voice”. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence” at a specific timing during a specific “round” (for example, between rounds in which the time until the start of the next round is longer than usual), “sound” It is configured to execute a touch effect by a “ramp”. For example, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” at an early timing when a round is long, “nice!” A blessing effect such as is performed. As described above, by providing an effect related to a game (according to a skill) in accordance with a situation such as a period between rounds or a change state of touch detection, an opportunity to improve a skill of the player is provided. Can be.

  In the above-mentioned "specific production", similarly to the above-mentioned "between rounds", when the touch detection changes from "absence" to "present" for the first time, the other production performed in the "specific production" On the condition that there is no influence, control is performed so that the effect of "sound" is performed, while control is performed so that the effect of "image" and "lamp" is not executed. In addition, when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “presence” and then the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “presence” again, or when the “identification” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed. In the case of “under production”, control is performed so as not to execute any of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp”.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” for the first time, and when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “presence” to “absent” In the case of (after the predetermined number of times), similarly to the above-mentioned “during round”, none of the touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed. Furthermore, "under a specific effect" under specific conditions, such as after an operation of an effect button, does not affect other effects performed during "specific effect" (for example, touch detection during a specific effect period). It is controlled to perform any of the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” on condition that the effect execution lottery is won.

  As described above, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at a predetermined timing “during a specific effect” (for example, a timing after announcing the result in the promotion effect or the consecutive information effect effect), “voice” is used. It is configured to execute a touch effect. For example, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at the timing, “lucky!” Is performed. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” at a predetermined timing “during a specific effect” (for example, at a timing of waiting for an input in a promotion effect or a reaming information effect), the “effect button” is pressed. It is configured to notify the result of the specific effect by "directing", "sound", and "lamp", assuming that it has been operated. For example, during the instruction display of "press the button!" When the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, an effect corresponding to the result of the specific effect is executed. In this way, by executing a touch effect according to the result of the specific effect, or by using the execution trigger of the effect as a substitute for another input during the specific effect, it is preferable to change the touch operation during the specific effect in the hit game. It can be used for

  In the above “end demonstration”, similar to the above “specific production”, when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present” for the first time, other productions performed at the “end demonstration” Is controlled so that the effect of "sound" is performed on condition that there is no effect on the image, and the effect of "image" and "lamp" is not executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” and then changes again from “absent” to “present”, or when “end” under a specific condition such as after the operation of the effect button is performed. In the case of "demonstration", control is performed so as not to execute any of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” for the first time, and when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “presence” to “absent” In the case of (after the predetermined number of times), similarly to the above-mentioned “during round”, none of the touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed. Further, in the “end demonstration” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the production button, the “image”, “sound”, “ The control is performed so as to perform all the effects of “ramp”.

As described above, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at a predetermined timing “during the end demonstration” (for example, a timing immediately before the end of the end demonstration), the touch effect by “voice” is executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence” at the timing, an effect such as “Please work hard next time!” Is executed according to the notification result by “voice”. You. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” at a predetermined timing “during the end demonstration” (for example, a timing immediately after the start of the end demonstration), the “production”, “sound”, and “lamp” are used. The touch effect is configured to be executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” at the timing, “there are many hits this time!” Effects related to “image”, “sound”, and “lamp”. As described above, by executing the touch effect in accordance with the timing during the end demonstration, it is possible to appropriately link the hit game with a change in the touch operation during the end demonstration.
<<<< Probable change (during electric support) >>>>

  Examples of the “state of the gaming machine” of the “state of the gaming machine” include “at the time of symbol stop”, “at the time of reach”, “during a specific effect”, and “abnormal display screen”. These situations can have the same meanings as the respective situations assumed in the above-mentioned “symbol changing” state. Then, in the example of FIG. 24B, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence” and when the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”, “the number of changes” is “first time”. In any of the “predetermined times” and “under specific conditions”, the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “ramp” are the same as those in the “design changing” state shown in FIG. It is defined in the same way as the production (with the same content).

  Note that, in order not to complicate the description, the state of the gaming machine is also set for “probably changing (electric support)” in the same manner as the above “during symbol change” during normal (non-electric support). However, as a difference between the symbol change during "probable change (electric support)" (illustration is omitted in FIG. 24) and the symbol change during normal time, the symbol is changed from the "symbol stop" state to the "game standby" state. It does not shift to the "medium" state. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine a game state different from the “symbol changing” usually related to factors such as the content of the effect to be performed and the difference in the control mode.

<< Production Type >>
As described above, the state of the gaming machine, the change method of the touch detection, the execution state of the effect by “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” according to the number of changes have been described. Based on the concept of "executing effects", it is common to adopt various aspects, such as those that have been described and those that have not been explained, in terms of "what effects to perform". It is possible. Therefore, in the following, the effect type suitable as the effect performed in the above-described situation will be described in more detail with some examples.

FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are a list of more specific effect types when a change in the touch state is detected in various game states.

  FIG. 25 shows, from the left of the chart, “type of effect to be executed when detection state changes”, “setting change relation”, “playing game standby”, and “symbol change”. FIG. 26 shows “type of effect performed when detection state changes”, “hit”, and “probable change (electric support)” from the left of the chart. 25 and 26, "setting change relation", "waiting for game", "during symbol change", "hit", and "probable change (electric support)" indicate the state of the gaming machine. 24 (a) and 24 (b) mean the same as the classification shown as "the state of the gaming machine".

  Among the items shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the “kind of effect to be executed when the detection state changes” is when the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “presence” and when “touch” is changed from “presence” to “absence”. This is a list of the types of effects that can be performed in the event of the above. Then, as shown in FIG. 25, as the types of effects belonging to “types of effects to be performed when the detection state changes”, “transition to another mode (effect)”, “effect related to character”, “game "Promotion to promote", "Production to keep the game finished", "Production related to RTC", "Production prevention related production", "Card production prevention related production", "Production presentation etc.", "Game result" And "touch notification".

  These production types are examples of various productions that are comprehensively classified based on functions and attributes. The type of the effect is not limited to the categories listed here, and other categories can also be adopted. Also, types other than the types listed here can be provided. Further, the types are not necessarily considered to be clearly separated, and for example, a certain effect may be classified into a plurality of types in an overlapping manner.

  Of the various types described above, “transition to another mode (production)” can be referred to as “production of another mode”, for example. The “transition to another mode (production)” is such that when the state of touch detection changes from “absence” to “present” (or “present” to “absence”), the production mode changes to a different presentation mode. Meaning something. The “production mode” is a (production) form / form that depends upon determining the production display contents such as a notice production or a reach production, and these production formats (production form) are controlled. It can be said that it is specified by the difference in data code. Examples of the types of the effect modes include stages A to Z in a normal state and stages a to g in a probable change (electric support).

  In the above-mentioned “effect related to the character”, when the state of the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” (or “present” to “absent”), the effect using the character is started or the use of the character is started. It means something that changes the content of the production. In addition, the above-mentioned “promotion to promote the game” is something that advances the story on the production, develops the production content, or executes the button production according to the change in the state of touch detection. Means. Here, as described above, the effect using the character can be classified into both "effect related to the character" and "effect promoting game".

  Further, as a specific example of the “effect related to the character”, there can be cited one in which an effect element related to the effect motif appears or changes based on touch detection. More specifically, for example, "Martians", "meteorites", "spaceships", etc. when the gaming machine has a space motif, "Battery" or "Dr." Alternatively, it can be considered that a “weapon” or “armor” in a battle effect appears in a story based on touch detection, or that an existing effect element changes to these elements.

  The above-mentioned "effect to keep the game ending" means something that can be expected to stop the player from finishing the game and leaving the gaming machine based on the change in the state of the touch detection. are doing. For example, the effect (limited frequency pattern effect) performed using the above-described limited frequency pattern table can be considered to be included in the “effect that keeps the end of the game”. Further, an effect that develops up to the middle of a series of stories can be considered as being included in the “effect that keeps the game ending”.

  The display of messages for the purpose of keeping the end of the game, such as "Please stay a little more!", "Don't stop!" And the like. In addition, when using the limited frequency pattern table as described above, a predetermined limited frequency pattern table is selected in response to touch detection, and in a few subsequent games, a unique rare effect is frequently appeared. Or, it is conceivable to make it easier to produce an effect that usually has a low appearance frequency.

  The above-mentioned “RTC-related effects” mean that the effects are performed based on real time using an RTC (real-time clock). For example, an effect performed as “E121: RTC” described above can be considered as corresponding to the “RTC-related effect”. In addition, for example, an effect performed using RTC, for example, an effect performed by deciding a date and a season, an effect performed by deciding a time zone of the day, an effect performed simultaneously by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines, and the like. It can be exemplified as “RTC-related effects”.

  The above-mentioned “effect of preventing intrusion” means a content that prevents the player from excessively concentrating on the game. For example, it is conceivable to perform an "image" or "sound" effect accompanied by a message such as "Pachinko is a play to be enjoyed moderately" or "Let's be careful about immersion".

  The above-mentioned “effect relating to prevention of forgetting to take out a card” means to prevent a player from forgetting to take out various cards from the above-mentioned card unit. For example, it is possible to think of an image or a sound effect accompanied by a message such as "Let's not forget to take out the card" or "Please do not forget to take out the card".

  The above-mentioned “effects such as game explanations” means to explain the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and the explanation of environment settings such as volume. For example, the type of the big hit and the degree of expectation (big hit probability), the type of the effect mode, the introduction of the characters appearing, and the display of the environment setting menu may be displayed as the effect of “image”.

  The above-described “reporting effect on game results” means a reporting effect on game results, such as determination of success or failure, and the type of big hit. For example, a notification effect of a result related to the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation) can be exemplified. In this case, as will be described later, it is conceivable not to perform the “reporting effect on the game result” during the “standby game” in FIG. 25. In addition, as the “reporting effect on the game result”, the transition of the payout of the pachinko gaming machine 10 on that day, the number of big hits, and the like, the number of big hits, the number of obtained balls, etc. during the probability change or during the electric support are used as the “image” effects. It can also be displayed.

  The above-mentioned “touch notification” means to notify that a touch operation has been performed. Here, as the “touch notification”, in a broad sense, it is possible to consider including effects of the types described above, such as a predetermined effect being started when a touch is detected, and a change in the effect. 25, "touch notification" shown in FIG. 25 means that a touch operation (touch detection) is performed, and "touch notification" includes, for example, " There is a character display such as "touch operation has been performed" or voice display, or a predetermined lamp (LED) is turned on.

  And as an effect other than "touch notification", there can be mentioned an effect executed irrespective of the presence or absence of touch detection. The effects other than the “touch notification” include, for example, a notice during the change of the symbol, an effect during the big hit, an effect used during the demonstration, and the like.

In the example of FIG. 25, the types of “dedicated” and “shared” are further provided for the various types of “effect related to the character” to “touch notification” described above. Of these, "dedicated" is provided as a dedicated one for each of "character-related effects" to "touch notification", and as effects other than "character-related effects" to "touch notification" based on touch detection. Means production that is not used. Further, “shared” means an effect that is also used as an effect other than “effect related to a character” based on touch detection, other than “touch notification”.
<<<< Setting change relation >>>>

  Among the states of the various types of gaming machines shown in FIG. 25, the above-mentioned “setting change relation” includes states of “setting change” and “setting display” as in the example of FIG. I have. Here, the situation represented by “setting being changed” and “setting being displayed” is the same as in the example of FIG. Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbols “○”, “△”, and “×” are used, and the meanings of these symbols are “O” as in the example of FIG. "Indicates that execution is preferable," 、 "indicates that execution is preferable or possible under certain conditions, and" x "indicates that execution is not preferable or difficult.

  Among these, “△” indicates that the effectiveness is conditionally indicated, but it is possible to adopt a control mode in which any effect is executed. Further, “×” indicates a control mode that is not preferable or difficult to execute, but is intentionally executed. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbol “−” is used, and the symbol “−” indicates that the effect is not assigned here.

  Then, in the state of “setting change relation” shown in FIG. 25, since “setting is being changed” or “setting is being displayed”, the touch detection shown at the left end in the figure has changed from “absent” to “present”. In this case, “transition to another mode (production)” is not executed (×). In addition, the “effect related to the character” to the “notification effect related to the game result” are both “dedicated” and “shared” as described above.

  The effect of “exclusive” according to the above “touch notification” is suitable or possible to be executed under certain conditions in both “setting change” and “setting display” (△). The effect of “shared” is unfavorable or difficult to execute (×) in both “setting change” and “setting display”.

  Regarding the state of the “setting change relation”, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, the “touch related” to “touch notification” is changed from the above touch detection to “absent”. Similar to the case of "Yes", an agreement on the type of effect is made.

  In addition, as shown by “△” in the “setting change relation” in the “gaming machine state” of FIG. 24A, in the “setting change relation” state, only the effect by the “ramp” can be executed. There is. In FIG. 25, “△” indicates that the effect of “touch notification” performed in the state of “setting change relation” is a special effect of notifying touch detection using a lamp. . On the other hand, since it is an effect using a lamp, various effects such as “effect related to the character”, “effect promoting game”, or “effect holding game end” cannot be executed. "-", Which is not subject to the regulation here, is shown.

In accordance with these agreements, the item “△” (in this case, the “dedicated” “touch notification” effect) should not interfere with the display of “setting change” or “setting display”. The effect can be performed in a suppressed manner. The item “x” (here, “touch notification” of “shared”) is not executed. Here, as an effect of “touch notification” of “dedicated”, it is possible to exemplify that characters such as “setting is being changed” or “setting is being displayed” are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
<<< Game waiting >>>

  Subsequently, the “during game standby” state includes a “demo screen”, an “adjustment screen”, a “change standby screen”, an “initialization notification”, and an “abnormality notification”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. In the “demo screen” (during display) during “standby game”, it is preferable to execute “transition to another mode (effect)” when the touch detection changes from “nothing” to “present”. (○). Further, the “effect related to the character” and the “effect promoting the game” are preferably executed for both “dedicated” and “shared” (○).

  Further, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present”, “staging to stop the game” is not preferable or difficult to execute for both “dedicated” and “shared” (×) It has been. Further, the “RTC-related effects” and the “introduction prevention-related effects” are preferably executed for both “dedicated” and “shared” (○). The “production” is suitable or possible to be executed under certain conditions for both “dedicated” and “shared” (△).

  The reason why the “effect of preventing forgetting to take out the card” is “△” is based on the following idea. In other words, it is desirable that the "effect of preventing the forgetting to remove a card" be performed when there is a high possibility of leaving the seat, such as at the end of a game, and so if the touch detection changes from "absence" to "present". The effect of the production is considered to be small. On the other hand, for example, under a specific condition, for example, the execution of the touch effect is permitted after the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absence”, but the predetermined time has not elapsed (in the case of leaving the seat for a short time). In the limit, it is considered that performing related effects such as "Did you forget to take out a card?", Etc., at the beginning of the game will have a certain effect. You may. Therefore, it is preferable (出) that the “effect of preventing the forgetting to take out the card” be executed under certain conditions.

  In addition, the “production of game explanations, etc.” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “reported production related to game results” is “dedicated” because the corresponding notification is not performed. , “Shared”, the agreement is not specified, and “-” is indicated. Further, “touch notification” is indicated by “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  In addition, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence” in the “demo screen”, “transition to another mode (production)” is “x”. When the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”, as described above (if necessary, see FIG. 24), the corresponding notification is not performed, so that both “dedicated” and “shared” are negotiated. "-" Which is not subject to the above.

  Subsequently, in the (adjustment screen) (while displaying) in the “standby game”, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “present”, the transition from “transition to another mode (production)” to “game” "Promotion to promote" is described as "△". Furthermore, the “effect that keeps the game ending” is “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “RTC-related effect” is “red” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Δ ”.

  Here, the reason why “RTC-related effects” is “△” meaning conditional, and “touch notification” is “○” meaning execution is preferable is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 24A, for the “adjustment screen” of “waiting for game”, the effect of “image” is not executed, and the effect of “sound” (condition of “ramp” with condition) is not performed. Combined use). As described above, since the effect of the “adjustment screen” of “waiting for game” is limited to “lamp” and “voice” other than “image”, “touch notification” is prioritized and “RTC-related The priority of “draft” is lower than that of “touch notification”.

  In addition, from "effects related to prevention of intrusion" to "effects such as game explanations", both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked as "x", and "reporting effects related to game results" are applicable. Since no notification is performed, both “dedicated” and “shared” are set to “−”. Further, “touch notification” is indicated by “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  As for the “adjustment screen”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “x” when the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”. In addition, as described above (if necessary, see FIG. 24), the other “effects related to the character” to “touch notification” do not perform the corresponding notification, so that both “dedicated” and “shared” − ”. As described above, in the “adjustment screen” in the “standby game”, only when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “presence”, the effect indicating the touch notification to the extent that the adjustment work is not affected, and the game promotion Is limitedly executed.

  Subsequently, in the “fluctuating standby screen” (during display) of “during game standby”, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “× "It is. In addition, the “effect related to the character” and “the effect promoting the game” are “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “effect to keep the game ending” is “dedicated” , And “shared” are both marked “×”.

  In addition, “RTC-related effects” and “introduction-related effects” are “〇” for both “dedicated” and “common use”, and “effects to prevent forgetting to take out the card” are “ Both “dedicated” and “shared” are marked with “△”. In addition, "production of game explanations, etc." is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared". "Notification production related to game results" is " Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked "-". “Touch notification” is indicated by “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Of these, the effect on the card forgetting prevention-related effect, which is suitable or possible under certain conditions (△), is based on the above-mentioned “demo screen” -related effect on the card forgetting prevention effect. This is because the situation in which the effect of performing the effect is considered to be great is limited to a short-time leaving or the like.

  Subsequently, as the “fluctuating standby screen” of the “fluctuating standby”, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is set to “△”. I have. In addition, the “effect relating to the character” and the “effect that keeps the end of the game” are “O” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Here, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absence”, “transition to another mode (production)” is set to “△” because, for example, the player is in the state of changing standby and the If the player releases his / her handle from the handle (20) and tries to leave the seat, it is not expected to increase the interest of the game even if the user switches to another effect mode. This is because it is considered that there is a case where the user may have an intention to return to the seat. In addition, it is also possible to perform control such as returning to a default effect mode (for example, an initial setting mode at power-on or an effect mode in a case where a player has not been selected for environmental settings) upon leaving the seat. It is.

  In addition, “RTC-related effects” are marked with “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. “Directions related to prevention of intrusion” are indicated for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It is marked as "x". In addition, the “effects related to preventing forgetting to take a card” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “production of game explanations” is either “dedicated” or “shared”. Is also set to “×”.

  Here, “RTC-related effects” are “dedicated” and “shared” as “△” because the touch effect is different depending on what type of effect is used as the RTC extension. This is because it is considered that there are cases.

  In addition, as described above (if necessary, see FIG. 24), the “reporting effect regarding the game result” is not performed on the “variation standby screen”. “-”, And “touch notification” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Subsequently, in the “initialization notification” (middle) in the “standby game”, when the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence”, the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”. In each case, “transition to another mode (production)” is “x”. Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. This is because there is a high possibility that the player does not exist during the initialization notification immediately after the power is turned on, and there is no point in executing the effect due to the change in the touch detection.

  Subsequently, in the “abnormality notification” (while displaying) in the “standby game”, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from “absence” to “presence”, “transition to another mode (production)” is “× "It is. Further, “effects related to characters” to “effects such as game explanations” are both marked “×” for “dedicated” and “shared”. On the other hand, the “reporting effect on the game result” and the “touch notification” are both “dedicated” and “shared”, which are “実 行” executed under specific conditions.

Further, in the “error notification” (while displaying), when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “×”. Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. As described above, in the “abnormality notification” (during display) in the “standby game”, the touch notification is displayed to the extent that the adjustment operation is not affected only when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”. The effect and the notification effect on the game result are limitedly executed.
<<<< symbol is changing >>>

  Subsequently, examples of the state of “during symbol change” include “at symbol stop”, “at reach”, “during specific effect”, and “abnormal display screen”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. In “at symbol stop” in “during symbol change”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “x” in the case where touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”. Further, the “effect related to the character” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”.

  As described above, regarding the “effect related to the character”, the effect of “shared” is set to “×”. If the shared effect is executed when the symbol is stopped, it is distinguished whether the effect is based on touch detection or an effect related to symbol variation. This is because the touch effect cannot be performed and the effect of the touch effect is weakened. Such a situation is similarly applied to “at the time of reach”, “during specific effect”, and “abnormal display screen” which will be described below. For this reason, it is desirable to adopt a control mode in which the “effect related to the character” in “during symbol change” is executed only under special conditions in many cases (for example, during a hit symbol change). it is conceivable that.

  In addition, the “promotion to promote the game” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked "x". Further, “effects such as game explanations” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”. In addition, the “reporting effect on the game result” is “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It has been.

  More specifically, when the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “presence”, it is considered that the player is willing to start (restart) the game in principle, so that the game is continued. On the other hand, the effect that prompts the user is preferable, but the “effect that keeps the game ending” and the “effect of preventing forgetting to take out the card”, etc., when ending the game are not suitable as the effects in the state of “when the symbol is stopped”. It can be said that. For this reason, as described above, the “promotion for promoting the game” is “専 用” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked with "x".

  The “promotion to promote the game” here is to display characters and items to stimulate the expectation that the story of the production will proceed, and to display the character of “development?” Can be exemplified.

  Subsequently, in "at design stop" in "during symbol change", "transition to another mode (effect)" is set to "x" in the case where touch detection is changed from "present" to "absent". I have. Further, the “effect related to the character” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”.

  In addition, "promotion to promote the game" is set to "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "effect to keep the end of the game" is set to "dedicated" or "shared". "○" Further, “RTC-related effects” are “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “effects such as game explanations” to “effects such as game explanations” are “dedicated” , And “shared” are both marked “△”.

In addition, the “reporting effect on the game result” is “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It has been.
As described above, when the symbol detection is changed from "absent" to "existing" during "symbol stop" in "symbol change", effects and games that indicate touch notification under certain conditions are promoted. When the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, an effect mainly to stop the game is executed. In this way, it can be said that the influence on the player using the symbol stop as a criterion of the game end can be expected.

  In addition, in the case of “at the time of reach” in “the symbol is changing” and “in the specific effect”, the “transition to another mode (effect)” is “ × ”. Further, among the “reporting effects related to game results”, “shared” is “△”, and other effects are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Further, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absence”, “transition to another mode (production)” is “x”. Further, the “effect related to the character” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”. In addition, “effects for promoting games” to “effects such as game explanations” are both set to “x” for “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Further, “reporting effect on game result” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”. In “touch notification”, “exclusive” is indicated by “x”, and “shared” is indicated by “△”.

  As described above, when the touch detection changes from “no” to “present” or “presence” to “no” during “reach time” or “during special effect” in “symbol change”, a certain condition is satisfied. In addition to the effects during the change of the design, due to the change in touch detection, the notification effect related to the game results that are difficult to be confused with the effect when the pattern changes is added. can do.

  Furthermore, in the "abnormal display screen" (while displaying) in "the symbol is changing", when the touch detection changes from "no" to "present", and when the touch detection changes from "presence" to "no" Regarding any of the above, “transition to another mode (production)” is “x”. In addition, when the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “presence”, the effects of “dedicated” and “shared” of the touch notification may be performed under certain conditions, but as described above (if necessary, (See FIG. 24.) For other effects, the corresponding notification is not performed, so both “dedicated” and “shared” are set to “−”.

In this manner, in the “abnormal display screen” (while displaying) in “the symbol is changing”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, only the touch notification is performed under certain conditions. Can be executed, but other effects are not executed. Thus, it can be said that when an abnormality has occurred, it is possible to prevent a loss of interest, without inadvertently performing an effect such as promoting a game.
<<<< hit in >>>

  Subsequently, the “hit” state may include “during demonstration”, “during round”, “between rounds”, “during special production”, and “during end demonstration”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. At the time of the "start demonstration" of the "hit" (when the start demonstration is being displayed), when the touch detection changes from "no" to "present", and when the touch detection changes from "presence" to "no" Regarding any of the above, “transition to another mode (production)” is “x”. Further, “effect related to character” and “effect promoting game” are both marked “「 ”for“ dedicated ”and“ shared ”.

  In addition, the “effect that keeps the game finished” is “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “RTC-related effect” is “red” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Δ ”. In addition, the “effects related to preventing intrusion” are marked “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “effects related to card forgetting prevention” are defined as “dedicated” and “shared”. Both are marked with “△”.

  In addition, “production of game explanations, etc.” and “information production related to game results” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “dedicated”, “shared” Are marked as “△”.

  In this way, at the time of the "start demonstration" in the "hit" (during the display of the start demonstration), since it is not confused with the effect at the time of the design change, the game can be promoted regardless of whether it is shared or dedicated, By executing the effect related to the character, it is possible to expect an effect of making the bliss time more exciting for the player who is a big hit. Further, in such a situation, in relation to the end of the game that is not likely to be selected by the player, by performing an effect that keeps the end of the game, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being deprived of water. It can be said that it is possible.

  Further, in the "round" of the "hit", when the touch detection changes from "no" to "present", and when the touch detection changes from "presence" to "no", the "other" The transition to the mode (production) is “x”. In addition, “effects related to characters” to “effects such as game explanations” are both set to “x” for “dedicated” and “shared”. On the other hand, “reporting effect on game results” and “touch notification” are both marked “△” for “dedicated” and “shared”.

  As described above, in the "round" of the "hit", the firing is continuously performed (the state of "touch detection" is maintained), so that the minimum necessary touch detection notification and the In the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute effects limited to alternative functions, etc. in the case where a hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and does not hinder the firing performed during the hit which is the essence of the game It can be said that the effect setting at the time of an appropriate touch is realized.

  Furthermore, in “between rounds” in “winning”, each effect type is determined when the touch detection changes from “no” to “present” and when the touch detection changes from “presence” to “no”. Are defined in the same manner (with the same contents) as the above-mentioned "during round".

  In addition, as the “specific production” in the “hit”, when the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “presence”, and when the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absence”, “Transition to another mode (production)” is “x”. In addition, “effects related to characters” to “effects such as game explanations” are both set to “x” for “dedicated” and “shared”. In addition, the “reporting effect on game results” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It has been.

  As described above, in the “specific production” of the “hit”, the firing is continuously performed (the state of “touch” is maintained) as in the “rounding” and the like. In the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute an effect limited to an alternative function or the like in a case where a hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and does not disturb the firing performed during the hit which is the essence of the game It can be said that the effect setting at the time of appropriate touch can be realized while the effect is kept within the range.

  Further, in the "end demonstration" of "hit" (during the display of the end demo), when the touch detection is changed from "absence" to "presence", "transition to another mode (effect)" is " × ”. In addition, the “effects related to characters” to “RTC-related effects” are “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “effects related to preventing intrusion” and “forgot card removal” “Prevention-related production” is indicated by “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Furthermore, “production of game explanations, etc.” is “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. “Information production related to game results” is set for both “dedicated” and “shared”. "○" “Touch notification” is “知” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Further, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “absence”, “transition to another mode (production)” is “x”. In addition, the “effects related to the character” to the “RTC-related effects” are “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “effects related to preventing intrusion” are “dedicated”. , And “shared” are both marked “△”.

  In addition, the “effects related to preventing forgetting to take a card” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “production of game explanations” is either “dedicated” or “shared”. Is also marked as “△”. In addition, the “reporting effect on the game result” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It has been.

As described above, during the “end demonstration” (during display of the end demonstration) in the “hit”, in consideration of the possibility of leaving the seat or stopping the game at the end of the big hit, the touch detection “ ", It is preferable to execute a game result (for example, information on the game state after the end of the big hit), an effect for preventing forgetting to take a card, and the like. In addition, when the game content after the end of the big hit is complicated, when the touch detection becomes “absent”, it is possible to provide an opportunity to grasp the game content by displaying an explanation about the game content thereafter. It can be said that it is suitable.
<<<< Probable change (during electric support) >>>>

  Subsequently, the states of “during probable change (electric support)” include “at symbol stop”, “at reach”, “during special effect”, and “abnormal display screen”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. When the touch detection is changed from “no” to “present” and when the touch detection is changed from “presence” to “no”, the execution mode of each effect type is the same as the above-described “design variation”. Medium "(FIG. 25).

  Here, the following can be said about the specific game state such as during the probability change or during the electric support. For example, it is considered desirable not to shift to the demonstration state (here, the normal demonstration state in which the standby screen A is displayed) during the probable change or during the power support. In this way, the transition to the game standby state (normal demonstration state) can be premised on the low probability and low base state (non-probable and non-electric support state), and the touch effect It is easy to specialize in directing from the viewpoint of "game start". In other words, it is possible to produce the touch effect as a content emphasizing the content indicating “game start” from a low probability and low base state.

  In addition, it can be said that it is preferable not to execute the firing detection effect (touch effect) in the non-variable state during the probable change or during the electric support (it can be said to be a standby state in the specific game state). However, volume adjustment and light quantity adjustment are possible. In the example described so far, the adjustment screen (FIG. 33 (c)) is displayed by operating the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) during the demonstration screen (here, during the normal demonstration state in which the standby screen A is displayed). After shifting, volume adjustment, brightness (light quantity) adjustment, and the like are performed in that state. Then, even in a situation where the screen does not normally shift to the adjustment screen, such as a situation in a state other than the state of the demonstration screen, if it is in a predetermined state, it may be possible to shift to the adjustment screen by operating the effect button. . As the “predetermined state” here, for example, a gaming state in which the use of the effect button used for adjustment is not planned can be mentioned. More specifically, for example, while the standby screen B is being displayed, symbols are being changed, or a big hit is being played. In addition, the “predetermined state” may be a state that does not matter whether it is in the probable change state or the power support state during the change.

  Further, the above-described adjustment meter is also displayed on the adjustment screen (FIG. 33 (c)) displayed under such conditions. In addition, the display priority (display priority) of the adjustment screen in the situation is determined from the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c) and the areas of the hold display (the first number-of-holds display section 196 and the second number-of-holds display section 197). May be higher or lower. Further, on the adjustment screen displayed while satisfying the above-mentioned “predetermined state” condition, the display of the adjustment meter as described above is, for example, a simplified image object (eg, a design object (FIG. 33C)). (Simple image). This is because it is suitable when the necessity of another display is higher. Note that the display of the above-described simple image is performed on a normal adjustment screen, such as displaying only the volume adjustment meter or the light amount adjustment meter relatively small on the screen or displaying translucently. It is desirable that the visibility be lower than in the case.

It should be noted that, also on the adjustment screen displayed under such conditions, it is possible to adjust the volume, light amount, and the like by using the cross key (96). In order to display the adjustment screen (including the simplified image), for example, in addition to the control mode of pressing the operation button (22) during the change to display the adjustment screen (simple image), the operation button (22) during the change is displayed. It is possible to adopt a control mode in which the cross key (96) is directly operated without pressing. As a specific example, when the cross key (96) is operated while the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed, and furthermore, the cross key (96) is displayed during the display. 96), the volume and the light amount are adjusted by the additional operation. In addition, when the cross key (96) is operated while the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed, and both the volume and the light amount are adjusted. (The display of the adjustment screen and the adjustment of the volume or light amount are performed together by one operation of the cross key). Also, even when touch detection and these operations are performed simultaneously, each process may be performed simultaneously, in which case, the touch effect is changed so as not to affect the recognition of the adjustment result by the player. May be output.
<Second and subsequent regulations>

  FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) relate to “whether or not the effect” shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b). FIGS. 27A and 27B relate to “after a predetermined number of times” of “the number of changes, etc.” related to touch detection, and for the effect that can be executed for the first time, the “change state” is the second time. This indicates whether or not the effect is restricted in the case of the later.

  Specifically, FIGS. 27A and 27B show “setting change relation”, “waiting for game”, “during symbol change”, and “hit” as “kind of effect to be executed when the detection state changes”. The rules for the production of each state of "medium" and "probable (electric support)" are shown. Furthermore, for these states, the presence or absence of execution related to “the effect changing function based on the effect button operation” and “the effect by touch detection” is defined. That is, regarding the change of the detection state of the second and subsequent times related to the effect button (the operation button 22 and the like) and the change of the detection state of the second and subsequent times related to the detection of the touch to the firing handle 20, whether or not there is the effect regulation in each state of the gaming machine Is stipulated.

  In FIGS. 27A and 27B, “with regulation” is indicated by a symbol “○”, and “no regulation” is indicated by a symbol “x”. Further, the symbol “△” indicates that the situation is further subdivided depending on the situation (“depends on the case”).

  For example, in the case where the state of the gaming machine is “setting change” of “setting change relation” and both of “setting display”, “the effect change function based on the effect button operation” and “touch detection In this case, the production regulation for “production” is “x”.

  When the state of the gaming machine is "standby game", the "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "variable standby screen", "initialization notification", "abnormality notification" Is provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect changing function based on the effect button operation" is "x". Also, as for “effects by touch detection”, “demo screen” is “「 ”,“ adjustment screen ”is“ △ ”,“ variation standby screen ”is“ ○ ”, and“ initialization notification ”is“ △ ”. , “Abnormality notification” is “x”.

  Subsequently, as for the case where the state of the gaming machine is "design changing", "symbol stop", "reach", "special effect", and "abnormal display screen" are provided as described above. ing. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect changing function based on the effect button operation" is "x". In addition, for “effects by touch detection, etc.”, “at symbol stop” is “△”, “at reach” is “○”, “under specific effect” is “○”, and “abnormal display screen” is “× It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the state of the gaming machine is "hit", the "start demonstration", "during round", "between rounds", " "Specific production" and "End demonstration". In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect changing function based on the effect button operation" is "x". In addition, the effect regulation in this case regarding “effect by touch detection and the like” is both “」 ”.

Furthermore, when the state of the gaming machine is “probably changing (electric support)”, the “at design stop”, “at reach”, “special effect”, and “abnormal display screen” are displayed in the same manner as described above. Is provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect changing function based on the effect button operation" is "x". In addition, the effect regulation in this case regarding “effect by touch detection and the like” is both “」 ”.
<Specific examples of production output timing in each state of gaming machine>
<< Example of production output timing in the state after setting change >>

  Next, a specific example of the effect output in each state of the gaming machine will be described in relation to the above-mentioned "whether or not of an effect" (FIGS. 24A and 24B). First, the timing chart of FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output when the setting is changed. More specifically, FIG. 28 illustrates an example of the effect output in a period from when the setting change is started with power-on to when the setting change ends and the state changes to a standby state. Further, in relation to the game state shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, after “C3: setting change (probability change) state” of “C: special state”, “B11: game standby state” and “B11: This corresponds to a situation where the game shifts from "game standby A (normal demonstration display)" to "B12; game standby state B (symbol stopped)".

  The "control state" shown at the top of FIG. 28 indicates the state of the gaming machine. The "control state" is "initial setting" in which the above-described initial setting process (FIG. 15) is performed when the power is turned on. The operation has shifted to the "setting change mode" in which the above-described setting change processing (FIG. 16) is performed by operating the setting key. Further, the setting change is completed, the mode shifts to the “normal mode”, and the mode shifts to the standby state (game standby state) as described above. Under such a premise, the effects on the state-corresponding output when an effect button or a touch is detected, and the touch effect performed at that time are shown in the subsequent sections.

  After the power is turned on and the initial setting is completed, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting key has been inserted, the “image display” corresponding to the setting change is performed as shown in “Status output”. , “Audio output” and “lamp output” are performed. In this state, when the operation button 22 or the like is operated, the state-corresponding output does not change, and the output of the corresponding "image", "sound", and "lamp" continues during the setting change. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes" while the setting is being changed, there is no change in the state-response output, but the touch detection has changed, as in the case where the staging button was operated. Is performed only for a certain period of time. After that, when the touch detection changes from “presence” to “absence”, the touch effect is not executed, and the state corresponding output does not change.

  Here, as an output related to “image display” during the setting change, for example, an output as shown in FIG. 36B can be exemplified. Specifically, the message "Setting is being changed" is displayed and the message "Setting is being changed. At the end of the setting change, the game will be transferred to normal game by closing the frame door." I have. Although not shown in the drawings, the output of "Setting is being changed" for "Audio output" can be exemplified as an output that outputs a sound of "Setting is being changed". Can be exemplified as an output that drives a plurality of predetermined LEDs in a pattern determined in advance as an output of “setting is being changed”.

  Next, when the above-described setting change is completed and the setting change processing ends, the control state shifts to the normal mode. At this time, the output corresponding to the state is, for example, “standby screen A” as shown in FIG. 33A as “image display”. In addition, audio output indicating “change completed” such as “setting change completed” is performed as “audio output”. Further, as for “lamp display”, “demonstration display” is performed in the drive pattern at the time of the standby demonstration. In addition, upon completion of the setting change, the prohibition timer of the touch effect according to “J: Set Permission Timing” in FIG. 23 is cleared, and the restriction on the touch effect on the standby screen after that is released.

  In this state, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, a touch notification or the like corresponding to the state of the standby screen A is executed. Specifically, the voice of the character appearing in the gaming machine as a performance for the above-mentioned character and the effect of promoting the game outputs a voice such as "Hello! A lamp display linked with the voice is executed, and a character image is displayed in the display area (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 34A if necessary). In addition, since the touch detection is set to change from “absent” to “present” as an opportunity for the standby screen to change from “A” to “B”, the image display related to the notification is performed as shown in FIG. When the standby screen B is displayed, a character image or a character display such as “Welcome ♪” is executed. After the production prohibition timer is cleared, the production prohibition timer is set when the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes", and the production is performed at the timing when the touch detection changes to "Yes" then "No". The timer of the prohibition timer is started, and a more specific processing mode of the effect output accompanying such touch detection will be described later.

  Next, when the standby screen A is displayed, the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”. Based on this, a touch notification effect and a state change to the standby screen B are performed. When the touch detection is performed, the processing such as the effect based on the touch detection changes depending on the timing at which the touch detection is performed. FIG. 28 illustrates a case where the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” when the standby screen A is displayed, and thereafter, the count time of the effect timer is not “0”. In such a case, the touch effect is not performed. Further, the touch effect prohibition timer related to the above-mentioned “J: setting of permission timing” is set to an initial value (for example, 60 seconds). Then, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, the timing of the effect prohibition timer is started.

  As described above, as described in the flow from power-on to transition to the normal mode (standby screen) via the setting change mode, the effect based on the touch detection is based on the gaming state of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The execution permission / restriction condition shown in FIG. 23 is used to determine whether or not the execution is to be performed and the content of the execution. Here, the production prohibition timer according to the production permission restriction condition will be described in detail.

  The effect prohibition timer is a time-measuring timer for determining whether or not execution of an effect based on the change in “touch detection” is permitted. Further, the effect prohibition timer functions as a clock timer in “H1: Processing of clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)” and an internal timer in “J: Setting of permission timing” shown in FIG. It is. For example, in the example of FIG. 28, when the setting change is completed, the effect prohibition timer is cleared. Then, regardless of what time the effect prohibition timer has been, a process for permitting execution of the touch effect is performed.

  Next, if a touch is detected during the display of the “standby screen A” as shown in “image display” of the “state corresponding output”, the touch effect is not allowed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) thereafter. Then, processing for setting the effect prohibition timer to "60 seconds" is performed. Then, when the CPU 521 is notified that the finger has been separated from the firing handle (20) and the touch detection has changed (in this case, the touch has been changed from on to off), a process of starting subtraction of the effect prohibition timer is performed.

  After the above-described subtraction is started (while the effect prohibition timer is being subtracted), if the touch detection is performed again before the effect prohibition timer becomes “0”, the effect prohibition timer is again timed (for example, (60 seconds), and when the state changes to a state different from the touch detection, the timing of the effect prohibition timer is started. That is, a process for controlling the touch effect not to be performed for a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) after the last change in the touch is recognized is performed.

Note that the effect prohibition timer is used for both the case where the touch detection changes from “no → present” and the case where the touch detection changes from “present → no”, when the effect relating to the touch detection is executed. It is possible to provide for each case.
<< Example of production output in adjustment screen state >>

  Subsequently, an example of the effect output in the state of the “adjustment screen” according to the above-described environment setting (customization) will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the state of the “adjustment screen”, the “control state” changes to “initial setting” when the power is turned on, and shifts to the “normal mode” when the power is restored (power is restored). Has been transferred to the standby state (game standby state). Then, the environment is set in the state of the “adjustment screen”, the environment setting is completed, and the state shifts to the standby state. Further, in relation to the game states shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, “B1: game standby state”, “B13: game standby C (setting screen for effect / voice, etc.)”, and “B11: game standby A (normal) Demo display).

  In the example of FIG. 29, when the power is restored, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” is changed to the “standby screen A”. Further, "audio output" is not performed, and "lamp display" is "demo display".

  As shown at the bottom of the figure, when there is an operation of the "effect button", the "image display" becomes the "adjustment screen" at the end of the operation detection. Further, the “audio output” is “adjusted audio (irregular)”, which is output (sample output) of the volume (adjusted volume) adjusted by the volume adjustment operation, or an adjustment screen (for example, FIG. 33). (C) It is possible to output an operation sound or the like of the movement of the cursor in the middle. In this case, since the input of the adjustment operation is required, it is handled as “irregular”.

  Further, the “lamp display” is “light emission at the time of adjustment”. This is to output light according to the emission luminance (light amount) set at that time. In the example of FIG. 29, the button operation of the “staging button” is detected, and the “state corresponding output” is performed based on the timing at which the detection of the operation is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The “state corresponding output” may be performed based on the timing of the start of the operation detection.

  In this state, if there is "touch detection", "image display" in "touch effect" is not performed, but "voice effect" and "lamp effect" are performed in a manner of touch notification. By preventing the “image display” from being performed in this way, it is possible to prevent the work of the environment setting (customization) performed while watching the screen display from being disturbed. When the adjustment operation is completed as shown in the center of the uppermost row in the figure, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” becomes the “standby screen A”. Further, "sound output" is not performed, but "lamp display" can be in the form of "demo display".

  In the example of FIG. 29, if there is “touch detection” after the completion of the adjustment operation, touch notification by “image display”, “sound effect”, and “lamp display” is performed. Then, when there is a touch notification at this time, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” is switched from the “standby screen A” to the “standby screen B”. The effect is not limited to an effect such as a change from the “standby screen A” to the “standby screen B”. For example, a touch notification (character display of “welcome”) is superimposed on the “standby screen A”. After that, the screen may shift to the “standby screen B”.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 29, the effect prohibition timer is cleared when the power is restored, and is set when a touch is detected. Further, the timing is started based on the timing of the end of the touch detection, and thereafter, the value of the effect prohibition timer becomes “0”. Further, an effect prohibition timer is set in the subsequent touch detection, and timekeeping is started based on the timing of the end of the touch detection.

In the example of FIG. 29, since the setting is not a change in the setting but is a (normal) power return, the effect prohibition timer is cleared after the power failure recovery, and the time of the effect prohibition timer before the power failure is determined. Regardless, the execution of the touch effect is allowed.
<< Example of production output in the state of the reach screen >>

  Subsequently, an example of an effect output in a state where the reach effect is being performed (a state of the reach screen) will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the state of the “reach screen”, when the condition for starting the change of the special symbol (and the effect symbol) is satisfied, the “control state” is indicated by the rising edge of the “symbol changing” diagram. Then, the symbol change is started. At this time, since the game is normally in a game state, the state of “touch detection” is continuing.

  In the example of FIG. 30, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” is the “standby screen B” until the symbol change is started. Further, “audio output” is an output of “BGM” corresponding to “standby screen B”, and “lamp display” is “demo display”. When the symbol change is started in this state, “image display” becomes “acceleration effect”. Examples of the “acceleration effect” include an example in which the effect symbol (190) starts to change and accelerates to a high-speed change.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 30, after the state of “notification effect / listening effect (tempering), etc.” is displayed in the “image display”, the state becomes “design sound effect” and reach occurs. Here, "notice production and taming effect (tempering)" means productions that have various kinds of notice productions, and that stimulate the expectation of the occurrence of reach. In addition, as the “symbol for design”, for example, an effect design in which the second temporarily stopped effect design is used to give the player the expectation of forming a combination of the first temporarily stopped effect design and reach is exemplified. it can. Then, in the "image display", the "reach effect" is executed, and thereafter, the effect of "symbol stop" is executed in a mode according to the result of the winning / rejecting lottery.

  Further, in the “voice output”, with the start of the design change, the output of “symbol during design change” associated with the effect of the design symbol 190 being changed is performed. In the “ramp display”, “lamp change during design change” associated with the changing effect of the effect symbol 190 is performed with the start of the design change.

  At the time of such a reach effect, it is conceivable to execute a "touch effect" to prevent the player from releasing the handle (20). For example, in the example of FIG. 30, the state with “touch detection” which has been continued until then is temporarily interrupted during the “reach effect”. Then, after that, there is the second “touch detection” in the period shown in FIG. 30, and after a certain detection period, the state changes to a state without “touch detection”. Then, based on the timing at which the second touch detection is stopped, “predetermined display” is performed in “image display” of “touch effect”, “predetermined sound” is output in “voice effect”, and “lamp” is output. “Present light emission” is performed in “effect”.

  As the “predetermined display”, “predetermined voice”, and “predetermined light emission”, it is possible to execute a notification effect relating to the game result or an effect for suppressing the stoppage of the game. For example, it is conceivable to directly or indirectly show the degree of expectation related to the occurrence of a reach or a big hit, or to output a "predetermined display" or "predetermined voice" of the content of "Keep your hand on ~". Can be The character display (382) of “Hot!” In FIG. 37B described above also corresponds to the “predetermined display” here. When an effect of "voice" or an effect of "lamp" accompanies, these correspond to "predetermined sound" or "predetermined light emission".

Here, in the example of FIG. 30, the counting without “touch detection” is started based on the start timing of “reach effect”. Then, the detection of the first state without "touch detection" after the start of the "reach effect" becomes the first "touch detection", and the subsequent detection of the state without "touch detection" in the example of FIG. There is no "touch detection" for the first time.
<< Example of production output in the state of big hit end demonstration screen >>

  Next, an example of an effect output in a state where the big hit end demonstration effect is being performed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the “control state” changes from the normal control state to the big hit state by the start of the big hit, and when the big win opening / closing control (round control related to the big hit game) ends, the big hit end demonstration state Become. Furthermore, when the state of the jackpot demonstration ends, the state returns to the normal control state. Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the effect of the big hit start demonstration is performed before the big hit start, but the illustration of the big hit start demonstration is omitted with respect to the “control state”.

  When the big hit is started, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” shifts from the “symbol stop” effect to the “big hit medium effect”. Here, the “big hit effect” includes effects during a round or between rounds. Further, the “voice output” shifts from the “symbol variation” to the “small jackpot effect”. The “big hit effect” related to the “audio output” here includes a sound indicating the progress of the round (round progress sound) and an output of a winning sound during the round (winning sound output).

  In addition, the “lamp display” shifts from the “demo display” to the “big hit effect”. Here, the “rendering during big hit” related to the “lamp display” includes a rendering for a round or between rounds. Each of the “image display”, “voice output”, and “lamp display” “during big hit” is performed until the big win opening / closing control ends. In the example of FIG. 31, “touch detection” at this time is a state in which “touch detection” is present.

  When the special winning opening opening / closing control ends, the “image display” and the “lamp display” of the “state-responsive output” shift to the respective “big hit end demonstration display”. Further, the “voice output” shifts to “big hit end demonstration BGM or the like”. When the big hit demonstration ends, “image display” shifts to “symbol stop”. Further, "sound output" and "lamp display" are stopped during "symbol stop". Then, when the "symbol stop" of the "image display" is completed, the "sound output" becomes "BGM", and the "lamp display" corresponds to the state of the gaming machine thereafter.

  Here, in FIG. 31, the reason why no character is described in the diagram relating to the “lamp display” after the “symbol stop” ends (the reason why it is blank) depends on the state of the gaming machine. Because it is difficult to identify in the figure. In the example of FIG. 31, the “voice output” and the “lamp display” are stopped during the “symbol stop”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the BGM while the symbols are stopped (the game mode at that time) For example, a BGM for the BGM or a lamp display pattern may be provided to output these.

  In the example of FIG. 31, after the special winning opening opening / closing control ends, the state is temporarily “touch detected”, and changes to the state “touch detected” during the subsequent big hit end demonstration. Furthermore, during the big hit end demonstration, a change to a state without “touch detection” and a change to a state with “touch detection” are performed.

  Then, regarding the “touch effect”, during the big hit end demonstration, based on the timing at which “touch detection” is first absent, the “predetermined display” related to the “image effect” and the “predetermined sound” related to the “sound effect” , "Predetermined light emission" related to "lamp effect" is also executed. The “predetermined display”, “predetermined sound”, and “predetermined light emission” at this time include, for example, an effect for preventing a game card or a game coin storing a game medium amount from being forgotten or a game result during a big hit control. Production for information and the like can be mentioned.

  In the example of FIG. 31, the subsequent touch detection is the detection of the first “touch detection”. Further, the subsequent touch detection during the big hit end demonstration is the detection of the presence of the second “touch detection”. Then, based on the timing of the second “touch detection”, “predetermined display” related to “image production”, “predetermined sound” related to “voice production”, and “predetermined light emission” related to “ramp production” again Is also executed.

  As described above, when the “predetermined display”, the “predetermined sound”, and the “predetermined light emission” are performed a plurality of times (here, twice) during the same type of period (here, during the big hit end demonstration), the “predetermined display” , "Predetermined sound" and "predetermined light emission" are desirably made different from each other. For example, when an effect for preventing a game card or a game coin from being forgotten is executed as the first “touch effect”, an effect for notifying the game result during the big hit control as the later “touch effect” For example, it is possible to exemplify the production of a content that promotes the desire for the next game.

As described above, the effect output examples in some states of the gaming machine have been described based on FIGS. 28 to 31, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to consider the effect output examples in other states. is there.
<Example of production output after power interruption>
<< In the case of a game standby state (one of the display screens A to C) when the power is turned off >>

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect output after restoration from power interruption. FIG. 32 (a) conceptually shows screen display control when the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned off is a game standby state, and thereafter when the power is turned on again (the power is restored). . Here, as the game standby state, the above-mentioned “B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)”, “B12: Game standby B (during symbol stop)”, “B13: Game standby C (setting of effect / voice, etc.) Screen)) (standby screen A, standby screen B, effect setting screen C, etc.).

  When the power supply is restored as shown at the left end of FIG. 32A after the power failure occurs in the various game machine standby states described above, first, the sub-control means (here, the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301) is controlled by itself. After the initialization process, the process waits for a command (power return command) indicating power return from the main control unit (here, the CPU 501 of the main board 102).

  At this point, no image is displayed on the image display device (the effect display device 60 in this case) (corresponding to “screen non-display” in the figure). Thereafter, the sub-main CPU 521 receives the power return command from the main CPU 501, and determines from the command content and the like that the return is not accompanied by the RWM clear or the setting change, and that the game state is in the game standby state. Then, a power return process based on the condition is performed, and the initialization process ends.

  When the initialization processing is completed (corresponding to “preparation completed” in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 performs normal processing (processing for updating effect random numbers, lamp display control, voice control, and the like), and performs the effect display device. At (60), a sub-main command for displaying the standby screen A is output irrespective of which of the standby screens A to C was displayed before the power was turned off. Further, after clearing (setting to a predetermined value) the value of the clock timer for changing the screen, the sub-main CPU 521 executes a power-on notification process for notifying that the power is restored without RWM clearing.

  As an example of an effect display by the power-on notification processing, for example, characters such as “power has been restored” or “energized” shown in FIG. 35A are displayed on the effect display device (60), and the gaming machine frame ( An example of 11) is to illuminate the LED in a predetermined lighting pattern. Further, it is conceivable that the effect display by the power-on notification processing is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds). In this embodiment, after the initialization processing is completed, even if the power-on notification is being executed, the operation means (the operation button (22), which is an effect button) is operated by the above-described normal processing. The input is determined, and the standby screen can be changed according to the input. Such power-on notification processing and normal processing are shown as "power-on notification" and "normal processing (individual processing, command / operation means input wait)" in the figure. “Individual processing” means individual display control processing, random number update processing, timekeeping processing, and the like.

  After the clock timer is initialized by the end of the initialization process as described above, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed based on the clock timer (the value of the clock timer becomes “0” by subtraction). When the timer changes to a predetermined value (30 seconds in this case) due to the addition, it is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to “time A”) has arrived, and the screen display waits. The screen is changed from the screen A to the standby screen B. Then, a value corresponding to the time when the standby screen B changes to the standby screen A again is set in the clock timer. For example, when the timekeeping timer is to be added, the arrival time “20 seconds” is set, and when the timekeeping timer is to be subtracted, a value required until it becomes “0” (for example, 2 ms). 10000 that becomes 0 in 20 seconds by subtraction for each interrupt) is set.

Then, similarly to the case of the standby screen A, when a predetermined time elapses after the standby screen B is displayed (for example, when the clock timer is decremented to “0”, or when the clock timer is added, In the case of “20 seconds”, for example, it is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to “time B”) has arrived, and the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. When the game is performed while the standby screen A or the standby screen B is displayed and the winning prize opening (62, 63) is won, a transition is made to the symbol variation screen, and when the firing handle 20 is touched. Is a screen transition to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as a superimposed display of the character "Welcome"). In the example of FIG. 32A, it is assumed that there is no operation of the operation button (22) and no touch detection.
<< If the design is changing when the power is turned off >>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32B, an example of an effect output in the case where the symbol is changing when the power is turned off will be described. FIG. 32 (b) illustrates the concept of screen display control when the power is turned off when the symbol is changing and no hold has occurred, and then the power is turned on again (the power is restored). Is shown.

  As described above, when the power is restored after the power is cut off while the symbol is being changed with no pending symbols, the sub main CPU 521 first performs its own initialization processing, and then receives the power return command from the main CPU 501. wait. At this point, no image is displayed on the effect display device (60) (corresponding to "screen non-display" in the figure). After that, when a power return command is received from the main CPU 501 and it is determined from the command content or the like that the RWM clear or setting change is not involved at the time of return or that the game state is a symbol change, the condition is determined. Is performed based on the power supply, and the initialization processing ends.

  When the initialization process is completed (corresponding to “ready” in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 displays a power-on notification screen (for example, “power is turned on” in FIG. ) Is displayed and a symbol indicating that the symbol is changing is displayed, and the state is maintained until a symbol stop command is received from the main board 102. In this embodiment, the power-on notification performed during the standby screen is different from the screen display. As an effect example of the power-on notification at this time (power-on notification screen), the one shown in FIG. 35B can be adopted. After the initialization process is completed, even if the power-on notification is being executed, the input of the operation means (effect button) is determined by the normal process, and if the input is valid, the input is performed. Can be executed. The output of the power-on notification and the normal processing are shown as “power-on notification screen” and “normal processing (individual processing, command / operation means input wait)” in the figure. “Individual processing” means individual display control processing, random number update processing, timekeeping processing, and the like.

  When the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 receives the symbol stop command from the main board 102 (corresponding to the “stop command” in the figure), the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol stop command or the information based on the power return command (the If the symbol to be stopped can be grasped by the determined default symbol combination or information, the symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, a symbol change standby similar to the standby screen B as shown in FIG. Display the screen. Here, in the present embodiment, if the symbol is changing at the time of power-off (power return), the clock timer is not initialized due to the completion of the initialization processing, and the clock timer is received at the timing when the stop command is received. Is set so that the standby screen B is always displayed after receiving the stop command.

  After that, in the same manner as the description during the standby of the game, when a predetermined time elapses after the standby screen B is displayed (when the timer is decremented to “0” or the timer is added, It is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to “time B” in the figure) has arrived (for example, “20 seconds”), and the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. When a game is played while the power-on notification screen is displayed and the player wins the start winning opening (62, 63), the standby screen B is displayed in response to the reception of the stop command, and then the screen transitions to the symbol variation screen. In addition, when the firing handle (20) is touched, the screen is changed to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as the superimposed display of the character "Welcome").

Although illustration is omitted, in each of the cases of FIGS. 32A and 32B, the initial operation confirmation processing that is normally performed on the movable effect member that is the movable role is an initialization processing. Later, these display processes can be executed in parallel with the display process, and the processes are executed until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable accessory is completed without being related to the display transition of the screen (screen display is shown in FIG. 32 (a) and 32 (b), while the operation for confirming the movable accessory is performed). Until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable auditorium is completed, control is performed so that the execution of the effect of the movable auditorium and the like accompanying the symbol change is restricted. In the example of FIG. 32B, it is assumed that there is no operation of the operation button (22) and no touch detection. In addition, an effect pattern in which the movable accessory is operated by the operation of the operation button (22) by the player is selected, and the effect pattern is generated (executed) during the initial operation of the movable effect member, and the player is actually operated. When the operation button (22) is operated, the execution (actual driving) of the effect of the movable effect member is restricted.
<Touch detection and touch production and other characteristics>

  The touch detection and touch effects described so far can be considered as follows. First, for a touch effect (fire detection effect) executed during standby (during the standby screen A or the standby screen B), a game is actually performed by detecting a firing operation (touch detection and detection of a change in firing intensity volume). The execution time of the touch effect is shorter than an actual measurement value (for example, an average value based on a plurality of actual measurements) until the ball is fired and enters the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). can do. In this case, the touch effect may be completed in about 3 seconds.

  Conversely, for a touch effect (fire detection effect) executed during standby (during standby screen A or standby screen B), detection of a firing operation (touch detection and detection of change in firing intensity volume) is performed. The execution time of the touch effect is longer than the actual measurement value (for example, the average value of a plurality of actual measurements) until the game ball is actually fired and enters the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). It may be long, and in that case, the touch effect may be about 20 seconds. In this case, if a notice effect is generated in response to the ball entering the first starting winning opening (62) during the execution of the touch effect for 20 seconds, the notice effect is set to a predetermined first group (for example, when the character is If it is a simple announcement such as a speech announcement of the content that emits the speech), the touch effect is kept being executed, and the announcement effect is performed by another predetermined second group (for example, a movie announcement using the entire screen of the display device). If it is a non-simplified notice, the touch effect may be interrupted.

  In addition, although it cannot occur normally, even if the touch detection is performed after the rotation operation of the firing handle (20) (while the handle is rotating), the touch effect (the fire detection effect) can be performed.

  Further, when a start opening prize is received during execution of a touch effect (fire detection effect), it is possible to prevent the touch effect from being interrupted. However, in the case of a touch effect such as a sound, the sound volume may be set to “zero” according to the priority of the effect at the time of winning the starting opening, and may be continued. The present invention is not limited to this, and if there is a start opening prize during execution of a touch effect (firing detection effect), the touch effect may be interrupted.

  Further, when an error is detected and an error notification is executed during execution of the touch effect, the error notification can be given priority over the touch effect. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the touch effect and the error notification may be output repeatedly. For example, if a first error (an illegal winning error, a porcelain detection error, or the like) is detected, the touch effect is interrupted, but a second error (a firing direction error, a door opening error, etc.) does not interrupt the touch effect. It is possible to adopt a control mode.

  Also, when performing the touch effect during the volume adjustment at the time of customization (environment setting), even during the volume adjustment, the sound output related to the touch effect is output according to the volume adjusted at the start of the touch effect. It is possible to do.

  Furthermore, during the volume adjustment at the time of customization (environment setting), it is possible to prohibit the touch effect, and to prevent the touch effect from being performed even if the touch effect is performed in other situations. is there.

Further, the touch effect (fire detection effect) is interrupted when a game ball is detected at the start winning opening (62, 63) during execution, for example, but is interrupted at the operating opening (68) or the general winning opening (72). It is also possible to adopt a control mode of not interrupting when a game ball is detected.
<Operation detection signal>

  Next, various examples of possible operation detection signals (touch detection signals) related to touch detection will be described. As described above, when considering various aspects of the effect output related to the touch effect, it is also possible to specifically consider the operation detection signal related to the touch detection operation, to secure the reliability of the effect control, and the like. It is important from the point of view. First, with regard to the operation detection signal, it is conceivable to consider “1. Usage of operation detection signal”, “2. Transmission method of operation detection signal”, “3a. Processing when operation detection signal is received” and the like. Can be

  Among these, “1. Use of operation detection signal” can be used for various kinds of processing, or triggered by various kinds of processing. For example, the operation detection signal may be “(1) Guaranteeing operation by player”. Further, the operation detection signal includes “(2) transition trigger between the demonstration state and the normal state”, “(3) transition trigger to the special effect state”, “(4) return trigger from the power saving mode”, “( 5) External output trigger, "(6) Suggestion (method change) trigger for launching, etc.", "(7) Use for production (opportunity)", "(8) Use for fixed handle detection and notification", "( 9) Use for changing the production frequency, etc. ".

  In addition, as a signal generation method when the operation detection signal is used as “(2) trigger for transition between the demonstration state and the normal state”, a detection signal of the touch detection unit is used as a dedicated detection unit for the sub-main board (301). (First method). As a dedicated detection unit for the sub main board 301, a touch detection unit (touch sensor) in which an output signal is input only to the sub main board (301) can be cited.

  Further, as another signal generation method, it is also possible to adopt a method (second method) in which a signal (detection signal) of the above-described dedicated detection unit is subjected to some processing (signal processing) and used. In this case, it is assumed that a shared detection unit (shared detection unit) to which an output signal is input to both the main board (102) and the sub main board (301) is used. It can be used after some processing (signal processing).

  Furthermore, a method (third method) of combining the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit with another signal can be considered. In this case, the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit is combined with the output status information appearing in the “other signal”, and is used as a reference signal for detecting a change in the operation state. Output to the main board (301) may be performed.

  As a feature of the first method and the second method, since there is no need to perform synthesis with other signals, processing and equipment for signal generation are not required as compared with the third method. In some cases, the configuration can be simplified.

  Another feature of the above-described second method is that generation of input signals to a plurality of different input targets (here, the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301)) can be made common, so that individual input In some cases, the processing and the device configuration can be simplified as compared with a case where an input signal is individually generated for a target. Considering the influence of chattering on the touch switch (310) and the like, it is conceivable to require a touch for a certain period of time (for example, 50 ms) or more to enhance detection accuracy. Of course, by using a capacitor having an appropriate capacitance, it is also possible to configure so that an output can be obtained at the time of continuous detection for a predetermined time.

  Further, as a feature of the third method, processing on the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301) is performed by using a signal in a form other than the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection section or the common detection section. it can. For this reason, it is possible to perform processing on the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301) without being limited only by the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit.

  Regarding the above-mentioned “2. Transmission method of operation detection signal”, a processing mode in each control board can be considered according to the transmission path of the operation detection signal. For example, in the section from the touch sensor (310) to the launch control board (105), the signal line used for transmission from the touch sensor (310) is "(1) common to launch control". Alternatively, it is conceivable to use "(2) different from launch control".

  Here, as a mode in which the signal line is shared, if the touch sensor (310) is a three-wire sensor, three signal lines (power supply line, output line) derived from the touch sensor (310) are used. If the touch sensor (310) is a two-wire sensor using a common signal line, GND, etc., two signal lines (output signal line and GND) derived from the touch sensor (310) are used. , Or an output signal line and a power supply line).

  In the section from the launch control board (105) to the prize ball control board (payout control board 103), the signal line used for transmission is set to “(1) Independent signal line (output only for effect)”. Or "(2) common with other control signals". Among these, when “(2) common with other control signals” is used, it is conceivable to adopt a form (synthesis format) of combining by a method such as changing the transmission timing.

  Further, regarding the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102), "(1) independent signal line" or "(2) other control signal Common ". Among these, when “(2) common with other control signals” is used, transmission / reception in the form of a command (command format) or combining by a method such as different transmission timing (combination format) It is conceivable that the data is transmitted and received. Regarding the transmission timing, a signal transmission mode in which transmission is not performed in a specific case can be considered.

  Further, the section from the main control board (main board 102) to the effect control board (sub main board 301) may be set to “(1) independent signal line” or “(2) shared with other control signals. ". Among these, when "(1) independent signal line" is used, for example, signal transmission / reception may be performed at regular intervals (periodically). In the case of “(2) common with other control signals”, transmission / reception is performed in a command format as in the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102). Or a composite format. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the signal transmission timing is determined based on the relationship with the content and type of the previous transmission information.

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned “3a. Processing when an operation detection signal is received” can be considered separately for various game states. And, as the game state, "(1) During normal game", "(2) During special game (hit game)", "(3) Abnormal", "(4) Under preparation (recovery from power interruption / power interruption) Processing), "(5) During demonstration (unoperated)", and "(6) During demonstration (my-pachi operation / effect setting operation)".

  Among these game states, “(1) Normal game” includes a high base state and a low base state. Further, when the launch control board (105) receives an operation detection signal related to touch detection, it is conceivable to perform “(1) launch control process only when launch process is common with launch process”. This means that if a touch detection signal is received at the same time as performing the processing related to the firing control, only the processing related to the firing control is performed, and the processing based on the touch detection signal is not performed. I have.

  Further, it is also possible to consider "(2) disregard if it is different from that for launch control". This means that, when the processing related to the firing control is not performed and the touch detection signal is received, the processing based on the touch detection is not performed.

  Subsequently, in the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) or the main control board (main board 102), it is conceivable to store information related to touch detection until a command to be transmitted is transmitted. Further, in the main control board (main board 102), based on the information of the touch detection, for example, such as a variation pattern (fluctuation P) lottery, the effect on the effect lottery related to the success or failure may or may not be given. It is conceivable to do so.

  Subsequently, in the effect control board (sub-main board 301), based on the information on the touch detection, the selection target is branched in determining another effect (such as a variable effect or a look-ahead effect) different from the effect related to the success or failure ( If it is different, the effect is selected). Further, even when information based on touch detection is received, processing based on the information may not be performed, or processing for determining that the information has been received may be performed but no special processing may be performed.

Note that the processing related to “(1) during normal game” described above includes other “(2) during special game (hit game)”, “(3) abnormal”, “(4) during preparation (electronic It is also possible to appropriately adopt a state such as "recovery / power interruption processing"), "(5) Demonstration (not operated)", or "(6) Demonstration (my-pachi operation / effect setting operation)". Here, the “my-pachi operation” refers to, for example, displaying a two-dimensional code for providing information to a player, or performing information communication with a portable information terminal (such as a smartphone) of the player via communication with an Internet server. Or the operation for providing a service. The “effect setting operation” means an operation for the above-described environment setting (customization).
<Operation and effect of the invention according to the present embodiment>

  As described above, various control elements are examined for the relationship between the touch detection and the production output, and various control elements are adopted by adopting an appropriate control element from among the examined elements and applying the same to the pachinko gaming machine 10. It is possible to execute a production based on the above. Then, the operation detection of the firing handle including the touch detection can be more effectively utilized than before.

  For example, as described above, various kinds of “D: touch effect contents” are assumed, and subdivisions such as “D1: effect output destination”, “D2: effect data”, and “D3: only state change” are performed. By adopting the pachinko gaming machine 10 by defining the control process related to the effect output and adopting it to the pachinko gaming machine 10, various effects based on the steering wheel operation can be realized. The effect based on the steering wheel operation is further subdivided based on control elements such as "D1: effect output destination", "D2: effect data", "D3: only state change". It is possible.

  As described above, various types of “E: touch effect selection criteria” are assumed, and examples are “E1: game state (at touch timing)”, “E2: number of operations”, and “E3: customization setting”. By defining control processing related to the effect output and adopting it to the pachinko gaming machine 10, various effects based on the steering wheel operation can be performed. The effect based on the steering wheel operation is further subdivided based on control elements such as “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)”, “E2: number of operations”, and “E3: customization setting”. It is possible.

  Similarly, for the above-mentioned "F: change of effect state", "G: change of effect", "H: related to trigger parameter of touch effect", etc., similarly, various subdivided control elements are determined and pachinko game. By adopting the machine 10, various effects based on the operation of the steering wheel can be realized. Furthermore, the permission condition and the restriction condition of the effect are defined as “J: setting of permission timing”, and as other control elements, “K: change of touch state”, “L: touch detection method”, and “M: sub”. The transmission method based on the steering wheel operation can be further diversified by appropriately selecting and applying the same to the pachinko gaming machine 10.

  Then, as described above, the touch effect is examined in detail, and by performing the touch effect according to the state of the gaming machine, the touch effect in a mode based on the balance with the effect continued before the touch detection. Can be performed. Then, the touch effect can be combined with another effect without hindering other effects, and this combination can also diversify the touch effects.

Further, by executing a touch effect for each of a plurality of touch detections, it is possible to diversify the entire effect by continuing intermittent touch effects.
<Summary of Example>

As described above, various aspects of the effect based on the touch detection have been exemplified, but these can be summarized as follows.
<Summary 1>
The invention according to the present embodiment is characterized in that a game ball is fired in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning port (a first start port, a second start port, etc.) formed in the game area. As a symbol game, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and then stopped and then displayed, and when the symbol displayed in a stopped state is in a predetermined display mode, a pachinko game machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player. A main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game; and transmission information (such as a main command) which is communicably connected to the main control means and transmitted from the main control means. Control means (sub-main board, etc.) for performing control processing according to the above, effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means, Contact A touch detection unit (such as a touch switch) for outputting the game, and a rotation operation detection unit (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a rotation operation of the player. Some are output in response to touch detection, which is detection (such as touch effects).
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”) and the symbol game A game execution state (such as “B2: game state”) in which any of the special games is being executed, and in the game standby state, output contents of effects by the sub control means Includes a plurality of different types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving)” and the like), and any one of the plurality of types of game standby states It is configured such that whether or not an effect is output in response to the touch detection and / or the effect that is output in response to the touch detection can be different depending on the state.
Thereby, various effects can be executed by utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.
<Summary 2>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbol that has been stopped and displayed has a predetermined display mode, a pachinko game in which a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game; and transmission information (main command) which is communicably connected to the main control means and transmitted from the main control means. And sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) for performing control processing in accordance with the above-mentioned processing, effect output means (such as a speaker) for outputting sound as an effect under the control of the sub-control means, To detect Switch detection means (such as a touch switch), and rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player, the effect output means, the contact output of the player by the touch detection means A sound output (sound output or the like) can be executed in response to the touch detection as a detection, and a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as a state of the pachinko gaming machine. A state (eg, “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”) and a game executing state in which one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed (“B2: gaming state”, etc.) ), And the game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving)” and the like). Depending on which one of the game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not the sound is output in response to the touch detection and / or the sound output in response to the touch detection is different It is configured to obtain.
Thus, various sound effects can be executed by utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.
<Summary 3>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbol that has been stopped and displayed has a predetermined display mode, a pachinko game in which a special game that can give a profit to a player is performed Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (emission intensity volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
A production operation unit (operation buttons, cross keys, etc.) operated by a player during the production,
Among the effects, there are those which are output in response to touch detection which is detection of contact of a player by the touch detection means (such as a touch effect),
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, there is a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demo display)”),
In the game standby state, a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving)” in which the output contents of effects by the sub-control means are different) Including
Whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or effect execution conditions are determined so that the effect output triggered by the touch detection may be different,
The condition set as the effect execution condition includes which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, at what timing the touch detection is performed, and before the timing of the touch detection. Indicates whether or not the effect operation unit has been operated.
Thereby, it is possible to execute the touch effect associated with the operation state of the effect operation unit while utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.
<Summary 4>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbol that has been stopped and displayed has a predetermined display mode, a pachinko game in which a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detecting means (emission strength volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
Among the effects, there are those which are output in response to touch detection which is detection of contact of a player by the touch detection means (such as a touch effect),
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”) and the symbol game A game execution state (such as “B2: game state”) in which any of the special games is being executed,
The pachinko gaming machine includes a backup unit (such as a backup area of a main board) capable of storing a gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off when a power cut occurs due to a decrease in supply voltage,
Whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or effect execution conditions are determined so that the effect output triggered by the touch detection may be different,
The conditions set as the effect execution conditions include the timing of the touch detection and the gaming state of the pachinko machine stored in the backup unit when the power is restored from the power-off. In the game standby state, a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving)” in which the output contents of effects by the sub-control means are different) Including
Depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not an effect is output in response to the touch detection, and / or an effect output in response to the touch detection Are configured to be different.
This makes it possible to execute an appropriate touch effect immediately after turning on the power while utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.
<Summary 5>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed. Pachinko machine to do,
As for the time for changing and displaying the symbol as the symbol game, one variation time is set from a plurality of variation times,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (emission intensity volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
Clock means (clock timer, etc.) for measuring time,
Among the effects, there are those which are output in response to touch detection which is detection of contact of a player by the touch detection means (such as a touch effect),
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demo display)");
A game execution state (such as “B2: game state”) in which one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed;
The elapsed time in the game standby state is counted based on the timing unit,
Initializing means for setting the time measured by the time measuring means to an initial value based on the touch detection,
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the timing means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is allowed (“J11: Characteristic at time (variable / 1 fluctuation and Comparison) "),
The predetermined time is set to a time shorter than the longest fluctuation time (eg, 180 seconds) of the plurality of fluctuation times.
As a result, it is possible to appropriately set the permissible timing of the touch effect while utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.
<Summary 6>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed. Pachinko machine to do,
As for the time for changing and displaying the symbol as the symbol game, one variation time is set from a plurality of variation times,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (emission intensity volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
A production operation unit operated by a player during the production,
Clock means (clock timer, etc.) for measuring time,
Among the effects, there are those which are output in response to touch detection which is detection of contact of a player by the touch detection means (such as a touch effect),
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demo display)");
A game execution state (such as “B2: game state”) in which one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed;
The elapsed time in a predetermined game standby state is counted based on the timing means,
Initializing means for setting the time measured by the time measuring means to an initial value based on the touch detection,
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the timing means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is allowed ("J2: composite with other elements" or the like). ,
In the game standby state, even if the effect operation unit is operated before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (20 seconds or the like), if the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, subsequent touch detection is performed. The output of the effect triggered by is allowed.
This makes it possible to execute the touch effect regardless of the operation of the effect operation unit while utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.
<Summary 7>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbol that has been stopped and displayed has a predetermined display mode, a pachinko game in which a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (emission intensity volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
Clock means (clock timer, etc.) for measuring time,
Among the effects, there are those which are output in response to touch detection which is detection of contact of a player by the touch detection means (such as a touch effect),
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”) and the symbol game A game execution state (such as “B2: game state”) in which any of the special games is being executed,
The pachinko gaming machine includes a backup unit (such as a backup area of a main board) capable of storing a gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off when a power cut occurs due to a decrease in supply voltage,
A normal return operation for returning the gaming state of the pachinko machine after power recovery to the gaming state of the pachinko machine before power-off based on the contents stored in the backup means when returning from the power interruption. (Return operation in the case of NO in S111 or S113) and the gaming state of the pachinko machine after the power is restored to the gaming standby state regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine before the power is turned off and stored in the backup means. Specific return operation (return operation in the case of YES in S113) is possible.
Whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or effect execution conditions are determined so that the effect output triggered by the touch detection may be different,
The condition defined as the effect execution condition includes, in the gaming state of the pachinko machine after returning from the power-off, whether or not the elapsed time in the gaming standby state by the timing means has reached a predetermined time, And is included,
Regardless of whether the return is made by the normal return operation or the return by the specific return operation when returning from the power-off, the timer is set to a predetermined value (for example, 20 seconds) by the timer. I have.
Thus, it is possible to control the execution of the appropriate touch effect even after the power is restored, while effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 8>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbol that has been stopped and displayed has a predetermined display mode, a pachinko game in which a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detecting means (emission strength volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
The main control means includes:
Profit can be provided to the player according to the result of the game, and a setting relating to the provision of the profit to the player (setting of the degree of advantage of the player) can be performed.
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, including a setting change state capable of performing the setting, a normal state different from the setting change state,
In the setting change state, the output of the effect based on the detection by the touch detection unit is not performed regardless of the change state of the detection state of the touch detection unit and / or the detection state of the rotation operation detection unit. Have been.
This makes it possible to restrict the touch effect on the setting operation while utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle more effectively.
<Summary 9>

Another invention according to this embodiment fires a game ball in a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, or the like) formed in the game area. In response to this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is fluctuated and displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbol that has been stopped and displayed has a predetermined display mode, a pachinko game in which a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detecting means (emission strength volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
The main control means can fire a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation detected by the rotation operation detection means on condition that touch detection is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
Among the effects, there is one that is output in response to the touch detection (such as a touch effect),
The main control means includes:
After the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine, even if a game ball enters the starting winning opening before the touch detection means detects the contact of the player, the variation display of the symbol is displayed. And transmitting the transmission information corresponding to the symbol change display to the sub-control means.
This makes it possible to use the detection of the operation of the firing handle more effectively and prevent the presence or absence of the touch detection from limiting the progress of the symbol game. <Other embodiments>

  The present invention is not limited to the various embodiments described above, but can be variously modified. For example, according to the present invention, as described above, a game ball as a game medium obtained by a player is directly paid out to the player so that the player can touch the prize ball. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine (management game machine) in which game balls are circulated and used inside the game machine. Further, as the enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine, there can be exemplified a machine capable of electromagnetically recording the entrance and exit of a game medium.

  Further, the present invention includes a plurality of reels in which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, controls the rotation start and stop of the reels based on the operation of the player, and plays a game such as a game medal according to the winning combination won. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine (a spinning-type gaming machine) that pays out a medium (including storage in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of detecting the steering wheel operation, the operation of a bet button that can be operated by a player at the time of setting a bet can be detected, and the operation can also be performed by the player at the time of setting a bet. Based on the detection of the insertion of gaming medals, it is possible to apply an effect output according to the state of the gaming machine. Further, the present invention can be applied to a casino machine installed in a casino facility, for example.

10 pachinko gaming machines, 20 firing handles, 50 gaming boards, 52 gaming areas,
53 main control display device, 62 first start winning opening, 63 second starting winning opening,
70 first special symbol display unit, 71 second special symbol display unit, 90 big prize winning device,
102 main board, 104 sub-board, 113 first correct / incorrect judgment means,
117 second success / failure determination means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub main board,
302 Sub-sub board, 310 touch sensor, 311 emission intensity volume 311,
501 CPU of main board, 521 CPU of sub main board.

Claims (1)

A game ball is fired in the game area, the symbol is fluctuated and displayed as a symbol game when the game ball enters the starting winning opening formed in the game area, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. A pachinko game machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit communicably connected to the main control unit and performing a control process according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means for outputting an effect under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means for detecting contact of the player;
Rotation operation detection means for detecting a rotation operation of the player;
Volume control means for enabling the player to control the volume of the effect ,
The main control means can fire a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation detected by the rotation operation detection means on condition that touch detection is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
Some of the effects are output in response to the touch detection,
The main control means includes:
After the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine, even if a game ball enters the starting winning opening before the touch detection means detects the contact of the player, the variation display of the symbol is displayed. Performing, transmitting transmission information corresponding to the variable display of the symbol to the sub-control means ,
The pachinko game machine , wherein the effect output in response to the touch detection and the sound volume adjustment using the sound volume adjusting means can be simultaneously executed .